JP7058057B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

Some conventional gaming machines can execute a countdown (predetermined operation), and when the countdown is completed (a specific mode), a countdown effect (predetermined effect) suggesting the execution of a specific effect can be executed. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-211762

However, in Patent Document 1, when the countdown effect (predetermined effect) is executed, the countdown is always completed (a specific mode), so that the player cannot pay attention to the progress of the countdown effect. , There is a problem that the interest of the countdown production cannot be improved.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a predetermined production.

(Means A) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of executing variable display and being controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to the player.
Display means and
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the predetermined state is controlled, and a predetermined display is displayed on the display means, a predetermined operation is performed using the predetermined display, and the display mode of the predetermined display is set as a specific mode. An effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in response to the execution of the suggestion effect,
Equipped with
The effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect so that the period from when the display mode of the predetermined display becomes the specific mode until the common suggested effect is executed is different.
The rate controlled to the favorable state depends on the length of the period.
The predetermined display includes a first predetermined display and a second predetermined display different from the first predetermined display.
The period from the specific mode to the execution of the common suggestion effect differs between when the first predetermined display is displayed and when the second predetermined display is displayed.
When the predetermined effect is executed, the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the common suggestion effect is when the first predetermined display is displayed and the second predetermined display is displayed. It ’s the same as when it was done ,
The specific effect can be executed for a predetermined period from the time when the variable display is started, and the predetermined effect can be executed after the specific effect is executed.
When the specific effect and the predetermined effect are executed, the ratio of the advantageous state is higher than when the specific effect is not executed and the predetermined effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
(Means B) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means and
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the predetermined state is controlled, and a predetermined display is displayed on the display means, a predetermined operation is performed using the predetermined display, and the display mode of the predetermined display is set as a specific mode. An effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in response to the execution of the suggestion effect,
Equipped with
The effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect so that the period from when the display mode of the predetermined display becomes the specific mode until the common suggested effect is executed is different.
The rate controlled to the favorable state depends on the length of the period.
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute multiple types of the above-mentioned suggestive effects,
After the predetermined display is set to the specific mode, the notification effect for notifying the corresponding type of the suggestion effect can be continuously executed until the suggestion effect is started.
The specific effect can be executed for a predetermined period from the time when the variable display is started, and the predetermined effect can be executed after the specific effect is executed.
When the specific effect and the predetermined effect are executed, the ratio of the advantageous state is higher than when the specific effect is not executed and the predetermined effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
(Means 1) The other gaming machine is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Display means (for example, image display device 5) and
A suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach) suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state can be executed, and a predetermined display (for example, a counter image 138SG005a) is displayed on the display means to display the predetermined display. An effect execution means (for example, an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a countdown effect) in which the display mode is a specific mode (for example, the super reach notification mode shown in FIG. 10-18 (B)) in response to the execution of the suggestion effect. For example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10-10) and
Equipped with
The effect executing means performs a predetermined operation (for example, a countdown) using the predetermined display, and the success pattern in which the display mode becomes the specific mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (G)), an image of a counter. After the value displayed in 138SG005a reaches 0 seconds (countdown is completed), the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter changes to a success mode (a display mode for notifying the execution of the reach effect of the super reach). A failure pattern (for example, a value displayed in the image 138SG005a of the counter) in which the predetermined operation (for example, countdown) using the predetermined display is performed and the display mode does not become the specific mode is 0 seconds (pattern). The predetermined effect can be executed by a pattern in which the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter changes to a failure mode (a display mode for notifying the non-execution of the reach effect of the super reach) without completing the countdown).
There are a plurality of display modes of the predetermined display when the predetermined operation is performed (for example, a portion where the image 138SG005a of the counter is displayed in blue or red as shown in FIG. 10-11).
The rate at which the predetermined effect of the success pattern is executed differs depending on the display mode when the predetermined operation of the predetermined display is performed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (C) and 10-7 (D). The rate at which the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern differs depending on the color of the image 138SG005a of the counter displayed on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of a predetermined production.

The gaming machine according to the means 2 of the present invention is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Display means (for example, image display device 5) and
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach) suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and specify a display mode of a predetermined display (for example, counter image 138SG005a) displayed on the display means. An effect execution means (for example, an effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a countdown effect) as an aspect (for example, a super reach notification mode shown in FIG. 10-18 (B)) corresponding to the execution of the suggestion effect. (Part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 10-10) and
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
A success pattern in which the display mode becomes the specific mode by a predetermined operation (for example, countdown) using the predetermined display (for example, a value displayed in the image 138SG005a of the counter as shown in FIG. 10-12 (G)). Is 0 seconds (the countdown is completed), the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter changes to a success mode (a display mode for notifying the execution of the reach effect of the super reach), and the display mode is described above. A failure pattern that does not become a specific mode (for example, the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a does not become 0 seconds (countdown is completed) without the value displayed in the counter image 138SG005a becoming 0 seconds (countdown is completed), and the display mode is the failure mode (super reach reach effect). The predetermined effect can be executed by the pattern) that changes to the display mode) for notifying the non-execution.
A plurality of the predetermined displays can be displayed in the predetermined effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-11, a portion where one or two images 138SG005a of the counter are displayed).
The rate at which the predetermined effect of the success pattern is executed differs depending on the number of displays of the predetermined display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (C) and 10-7 (D), the countdown effect becomes the success pattern. The ratio to be executed differs depending on the number of images 138SG005a of the counter displayed on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of a predetermined production.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or the means 2.
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on any one of the predetermined display mode, the display number of the predetermined display, or a combination thereof (for example, FIGS. 10-7 (C) and 10-7 (D)). As shown in the above, the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the color and number of the image 138SG005a of the counter displayed on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, attention to the predetermined display can be further increased, and the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state by the predetermined effect can be grasped, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 3.
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
A special figure in which a start winning prize has been generated in the main board 11 and the effect control board 12, but not yet started, as shown in the modified example 138SG-1 which can store the information related to the variable display as the hold storage. The part that stores the hold data of the game as hold memory) and
Determining means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 10-6) that can determine the control to the advantageous state for each variable display).
Prior to the determination by the determination means, a determination means for determining whether or not the reserved storage stored in the reservation storage means is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the determination means shown in the modified example 138SG-1).
Equipped with
The effect executing means can display the predetermined display during execution of the target variable display that is the target of the determination based on the determination by the determination means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 10-6). The part in which the execution of the countdown effect can be determined by executing the variable display start setting process shown), the target variable display by the hold storage that is the target of the determination based on the determination by the determination means is executed. A predetermined display can be displayed (for example, as shown in the modification 138SG-1, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can determine the execution of the countdown effect based on the determination result of the determination means).
The rate at which the predetermined effect of the success pattern is executed differs depending on whether the predetermined display is started before the start of the variable target display or when the display is started during the variable target display (for example, a modification). As shown in 138SG-1, a counter is displayed on the image display device 5 from the case where the countdown effect is executed for the variation display from the timing when the variation display is started and the timing before the variation display is started by the determination of the determination means. Image 138SG005a is displayed to announce the execution of the countdown effect, and the rate at which the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern is different)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to the time when the predetermined display is displayed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 4.
The effect executing means has a plurality of start modes having different periods from the display of the predetermined display to the start of the predetermined operation (for example, FIGS. 10-15 (A) to 10- as a modification 138SG-2. As shown in 15 (C), the predetermined effect can be executed when the period from the start of fluctuation to the start of countdown is long or short).
The rate at which the predetermined effect of the success pattern is executed varies depending on the period until the predetermined operation is started (for example, as the modified example 138SG-2, FIGS. 10-15 (A) to 10-15 (C). As shown, when the waiting period from the start of fluctuation to the start of countdown is long, the countdown effect is executed at a higher rate than when the waiting period from the start of fluctuation to the start of countdown is short).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to the period from the display of the predetermined display to the start of the predetermined operation, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern and the type of reach. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the advance notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating the effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), (C). Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for loss. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value confirmation processing. (A) is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. Explanatory drawing which shows the information stored in RAM and the state which is cleared. It is explanatory drawing which shows the initial design for each received command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification mode at the time of activation of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process in the modification. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the effect control main processing in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the modification. It is a figure which illustrates the effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of a countdown effect and a freeze effect, and is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the effect mode of a countdown effect. (A) is a timing chart at the time of executing the countdown effect in the failure pattern, and (B) is a timing chart at the time of executing the countdown effect in the success pattern. (A) is a timing chart at the time of executing the freeze effect, and (B) is a timing chart at the time of executing the countdown effect and the freeze effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the countdown effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the countdown effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the countdown effect and freeze effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the modification. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the initial value in a modification. It is a timing chart of the countdown effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of open modes (number of rounds and open upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained and a big hit type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the opening mode similar to the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary that there is no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example,") which is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type of the big hit game state having the same aspect as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the current state is in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including the jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Upon receiving the effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying, for example, that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a process of protecting the data of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). Along with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of the jackpot) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (details are provided). See below).

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the look-ahead determination, etc. is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the pre-determination result of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time. It includes a process to determine whether or not it is. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time for the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. It is updated to 7 "and the production process during the big hit is completed.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 31AK)
Next, the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern and the type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (A), in the present embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1 in which the display result is "loss" without the variable display mode of the decorative symbol being the reach mode. -2, the variation pattern of reach loss where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode and the display result is "loss" PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., the display result is "big hit". , PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect suggesting that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8-1 (B). Normal reach <Super reach E <Super reach D <Super reach C <Super The order is higher in the order of reach B <super reach A. In addition, a reach that is determined to be a big hit may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach is performed via the normal reach. In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach, a development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 8-1 (A) and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In addition, although FIG. 8-1 (A) shows a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops to a super reach one step higher, a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops by two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, Super Reach E, which has the lowest reliability among Super Reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and other Super Reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the title notification is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively fueled and the effect of production is improved. The mode of notifying the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be different depending on the actual display result and the like. In addition, the font (Gothic typeface, Mincho typeface, etc.) and typeface (line book, regular script, etc.) of the title character may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach production, the production content of the reach production, and the like.

(Example of production operation of feature unit 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing the effect control process process based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. 8-2 and 8-3 are diagrams showing an example of the effect of super reach in the present embodiment. FIG. 8-2 (A) shows that variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” are stopped to enter the reach mode. After that, the production branches according to the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (C), the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. After a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction portion of the super reach effect (also referred to as the super reach effect), the image display device 5 has the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2 (D). The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character "SP Reach A") is displayed on the entire screen, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. As a result, the title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), the character 31AK003 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are displayed. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach A, which is confronted by, is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and in the battle production, if the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character loses, it becomes a loss.

When displaying the dialogue on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the voice corresponding to the dialogue may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), and may be displayed in subtitles at the lower part of the image display device 5.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2 (F). (Here, the character "SP reach B") is displayed, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "Super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of Super Reach B is changed. Be notified. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (G), the character 31AK006 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are displayed. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach B, which is confronted by, is executed.

As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction portion of the super reach effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

In addition, Super Reach A (Fig. 8-2 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (Fig. 8-2 (C) → (F) → (G) ...) Then, in the introduction part until the title is notified, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 8-2 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which super reach will be achieved after the super reach production is started and which title will be notified. Super Reach A and Super Reach B are not limited to completely sharing the production mode until the title is announced, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by paying close attention to the production. The parts may be made into a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect of displaying an enemy character or suggesting an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to the title notified thereafter. You may do it. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be executed after making it possible to specify which super reach will be achieved.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of super reach D, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the title 31AK007 of super reach D (here, the character “SP reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "defeat the enemy"), so that the title of the super reach D is notified. In this way, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the Super Reach effect. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 that suggests the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. Expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation that is a big hit, but it does not have to completely match the reliability of the big hit of reach.

It should be noted that the voice notification of Super Reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification becomes various and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during the reach production. In addition, although FIG. 8-2 (I) shows the same production contents as those in FIG. 8-2 (C) (Super Reach A, Super Reach B), the super reach effect dedicated to Super Reach D is executed. You may.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character "SP Reach E") is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. By doing so, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 which is an enemy character are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed. In this way, in Super Reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach production of Super Reach E, which has low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation by notifying the title without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)). , (H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. Even in the super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped and the title notification may be performed.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production is performed. The title is notified at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach having low jackpot reliability are notified. In E, the title was notified at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low jackpot reliability, the title is notified. The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area) of. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification becomes possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, or the display area for title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

The method of differentiating the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily different according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of reach with low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is different according to the reach effect, the display area may be different or the display place may be different as in this embodiment.

(Expectation suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed, and Super Reach D having lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach A and Super Reach B is not displayed. In the title notification in, the expectation degree suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the sense of expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed in at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

As shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, and the expectation degree may be suggested by a meter or a gauge, or the expectation degree may be suggested. The numerical value corresponding to may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) or the like, when the number of black stars is used, half of the black stars may be displayed so that the number of stages of expectation may be increased. ..

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. As a result, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, attention can be paid to the reach effect. Further, in the super reach D and the super reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until the determined effect described later is executed. As a result, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. Further, by doing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in order to improve the effect of the effect.

Although the production operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted here, for example, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when the timing for deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display) is reached, a decision effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed. The deciding effect includes a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "missing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), a determination effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is "big hit", the image 31AK013 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-3 (C), and as shown in FIG. 8-3 (D), the image 31AK013 is displayed. A definite decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived. If the display result is "missing", an image showing that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a reach loss combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even if the title is continuously notified during the reach effect, the title notification is terminated before the determined effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the determined effect, and it is possible to execute a sharp title notification.

In the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to execute variable display. , The method of displaying the decorative pattern during the reach production may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach effect.

When the image display device 5 displays a hold display, an active display, a character that is residently displayed during variable display, and a display related to mobile interlocking, it is appropriately hidden during the reach effect of Super Reach in order to pay attention to the reach effect. May be. At that time, these displays may be left displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as Super Reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected by the low-reliability reach production, and it is possible to pay attention to the reach production in the high-reliability reach production.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. 8-4. As shown in (B), the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. When developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (D), the title of Super Reach B is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source can be switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach the development has occurred. As shown in FIG. 8-4, when the reach of the development destination is the reach of performing the title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (display as if it has failed) is displayed. It may be displayed. By making such an effect, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gase, such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion production)
In the production operation example shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the black star indicating the expectation degree was displayed from the beginning on the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008, but five white stars were displayed first, and then the stage. It is also possible to execute the expectation degree suggestion effect that suggests the expectation degree by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), when notifying the title of Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 is expected to move. The effect of fitting into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, a voice "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and 8-5 (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (F), the black stars are highlighted as if they shine. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion production has ended.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (F), the black stars are displayed one by one, and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation degree suggestion display is increased by one step, but the black stars are two. Two or more may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be raised by two or more steps. Alternatively, a half black star may be displayed to raise the degree of expectation by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of displayed stars (the number of steps of the rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three and a half black stars are displayed. In addition, audio may not be output in some cases. By doing so, the expectation suggestion effect becomes various and the effect is improved. In addition, regardless of the number of steps of expectation that increases at one time, the same black star image is displayed, it fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of expectation that increases. You may try to perform such an effect.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command for designating a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, the effect based on the command is executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, characters, motifs, sounds output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changed by the operation of the player.

8-5 (G) to 8-5 (L) are examples of the effect operation of the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect mode. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (F). In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is specified, the title 31AK023 of Super Reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-5 (G). At this time, the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but the sound different from the normal mode (for example, the sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024 in Super Reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and is expected. The effect of fitting into one of the white rhombuses of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice "pon" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and 8-5 (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombuses are highlighted as shown in FIG. 8-5 (L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect of the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the effect operation when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation degree) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). (Including suggestive production) may be made different in the production mode. Depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the reach title and the execution ratio of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect according to the player's preference and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the expectation degree suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that gradually reduces the number of indications suggesting. Such an expectation degree suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation degree suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect for gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display showing the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, the image is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B). A development effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when the operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C), the title 31AK032 of Super Reach C (here, the character "SP Reach C") is displayed. , The title of Super Reach C is notified. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source can be switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach the development has occurred. Further, under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the notification mode of the title (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is displayed. Is notified, and as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), the title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK060 changes to red is executed. In this way, if the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and if the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 8-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

Further, when the title notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title changes is executed, the sound may be output according to the display mode after the change in the title display mode. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, the sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change.

(Execution timing of title notification)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) that is controlled to the jackpot advantageous state and the expectation level is improved, such as the advance notice effect and the development effect. By doing so, once the title is notified, an effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode. The advance notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. 7. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001).

In the case of a fluctuation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of super reach (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A), depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "missing". As shown in Fig. 8-9 (A), the display color of the Super Reach title changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and from "black" to "fruit pattern". Those that change, those that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the title. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be the "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the display area of the title may be the "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as a "fruit pattern" from the beginning. For those whose display color changes, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the display period of the title differs depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may differ depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the change timing may be determined to be one of them. Then, in the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or smaller than the number of super reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the display mode (for example, the display color of the line) of the character in the reach effect of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character's dialogue (whether or not the dialogue notice is executed) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "missing". As shown in Fig. 8-9 (C), the display color of the dialogue in the reach production is provided to change from "white", "red", "white" to "red", and this order (ascending order) is provided. ), The reliability of the big hit is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. For those whose display color changes, the display color may change after the dialogue is displayed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes.

In addition, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is used. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode between the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a ratio different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

In addition, instead of the dialogue notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

After determining the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), whether or not to execute the other advance notice effect and the effect mode are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance notice effect determination process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the dialogue notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but the title notice is given in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the unreliable super reach). And at least one of the dialogue notices may be feasible. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being decided by the decision ratio shown in FIG. 8-9, but the decision ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the decision ratio may be different depending on the type of super reach. good. By doing so, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of executable production modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the production becomes more diverse and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of feasible production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of feasible production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a unified notice effect, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect mode of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect that the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (action effect image, etc.) of the action effect may be common regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or dialogue does not change even though the action effect is executed. When executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes (the rate at which the action mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect, or the title notice and the title notice may be different. The ratio of which effect mode changes (ratio of which action) may be different from the dialogue notice, or the ratio of how many colors (steps) change may be different. .. By executing such an action effect, the player will eventually pay attention to whether the action effect image is displayed, the title or the dialogue, and the effect will be improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect and the effect mode may be determined at different ratios depending on the effect mode. By doing so, it is possible to execute the action effect according to the effect mode, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such an action effect, at least one of the title and dialogue is produced (display color) according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May change. By doing so, the player will pay attention to the production content of the reach production.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above-mentioned feature unit 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all of the feature portions described in the above embodiment are not essential configurations and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub-display device different from the image display device 5, a sub-liquid crystal display may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although expressed as a sub liquid crystal display here, the sub display device may be composed of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed to, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal display, various effects such as a notice effect and a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal display. When the title is continuously displayed even after the title is notified as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above embodiment, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. In this case, after the title is notified on the image display device 5, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. By doing so, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display can be displayed without disturbing the super reach effect in the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation degree suggestion display become easy to understand.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (mainly the notification for displaying characters) related to other effects. You may. For example, as a advance notice effect (for example, a look-ahead advance notice effect), when a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) in which the background image and the effect mode are different in the image display device 5 is executed, the shifted zone is executed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. When presenting a mission ("Reach with 7", "Use the stick controller to annihilate the enemy", etc.) and perform a mission production that will be in an advantageous state for the player when the mission is completed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Variation example 31AK-1 of the feature portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decision effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed, and then the display result is shown (). 8-3 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determination effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when the predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the victory or defeat of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, since the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest is improved.

8-10 and 8-11 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation in the modified example 31AK-1 in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), after the reach mode is set in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), the ally character 31AK041 and the enemy character character 31AK041. 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (C) to (F) and 8-11 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

Along with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modification 31AK-1, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, the image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-10 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to the happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is displayed. The large button image changes to 31AK047.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047 is displayed. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modification 31AK-1, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. In addition, the operation effect image may change without the action effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

Then, before a predetermined time from which the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 8-11 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is centered as shown in FIG. 8-11 (K). Is enlarged and displayed, and a display prompting the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, the operation to the stick controller 31A becomes an effective operation valid period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, the image 31AK052 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-11 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (M), a definite decorative symbol to be a jackpot combination is derived. If the operation is not detected within the predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 8-11 (L) is automatically displayed.

In this modification 31AK-1, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and an operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The reliability of the jackpot when it is done is high. Even if an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to an operation effect image with high reliability during the reach effect, so that the effect is improved and the player's expectation is raised. Can be maintained.

In the production operation examples shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11, the reach title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display are omitted, but the reach production shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 is omitted. Or may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation effect. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (presence / absence of operation effect, display of operation effect image, presence / absence of action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8.

(Variation example 31AK-2 of the feature portion 31AK)
A suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state may be performed. For example, a shutter effect for displaying the first suggestion and a reach title effect for displaying the second suggestion may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with a shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title production, an effect of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect is executed after the reach. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice of the above-described embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image composed of these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include each element E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title in red letters). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

When the shutter display and the reach title are displayed, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits a notification. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 8-12 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started as shown in FIG. 8-12 (b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. 8-12 (c).

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (d), the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed small, for example, in the upper right corner of the screen, and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. The reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as the reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect of emitting a specific sound (voice) indicating that the character has high jackpot reliability such as "hot" is executed. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title production, by outputting a specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the output periods of the common sound and the specific sound are completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

After that, the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-12 (e) is executed. Enemy characters are displayed on the left side of the screen, and ally characters are displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the characters "Battle win!" Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is notified that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect is completed, the screen returns to the variable display screen with the original number pattern. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and 8-12 (d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 include all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. By doing so, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. This makes it possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d) are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence / absence of shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. 8-8. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8 together with the decision related to the shutter effect.

(Explanation of Feature Unit 122SG of the Present Embodiment)
Next, the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. The front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment is omitted because it is the same as the feature portion 31AK described above. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the main board 11 in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment is housed in the board case 122SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, the lock switch 122SG051 for switching to a setting change state in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed. And, the setting changeover switch 122SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value such as the jackpot winning probability (ball ejection rate) described later in the setting change state, and the open sensor 122SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3. Is provided.

The setting switching main body unit provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052, is housed in the board case 122SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back left portion of the board case 122SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 122SG201.

Since the board case 122SG201 having the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 3 in the closed state. It can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame 3 by using it. Further, since the lock switch 122SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 122SG051. Further, the lock switch 122SG051 is also a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation) described later by a setting key. In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the embodiment in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is exemplified, but these may be shared by one key.

Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is not opened, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs and the like are included.

FIG. 9-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 9-3 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game using the first special diagram in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the variation start in the special symbol game using the second special diagram in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variablely displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data are set according to the fluctuation pattern to be designated and the like.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variation display result is "miss", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variation display result designation command indicating a preliminary determination result that the variation display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) is determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a big winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the large winning opening that notifies that the period during which the large winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data are set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to identifiablely display the special figure reserved storage number on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to identifiablely display the special figure reserved storage number on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating a newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (recovery of power failure, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started the setting value changing operation (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the setting changing state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the setting value change operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed. The command E105H is a setting value confirmation start notification command for notifying wp that the operation for confirming the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the setting changed state). The command E106H is a set value confirmation end notification command for notifying that the setting value confirmation operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip computer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform control operations, and updates of numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data in which the CPU 103 is temporarily stored in the RAM 102. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. And transmission operation to output various signals is also performed.

FIG. 9-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 9-4, in the feature unit 122SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the normal map display result, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 9-4, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 9-5 shows the fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is "missing", the variation display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to each of the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and also varies. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern") and varies. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "big hit" is called a jackpot fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "small hit" is referred to as a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the super reach fluctuation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are shown. Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed in the present embodiment, the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach β is executed is In that case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern are set so that the jackpot expectation that the fluctuation display result is "big hit" is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are used, for example, a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after determining first, only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided to determine these variations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the variation content (effect content) is predetermined for each variation pattern, but the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different even if the variation pattern is the same, depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 of the normal reach loss, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach loss, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo continuous effect is performed. When the set value is 3 as the fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach loss, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to obtain the fluctuation pattern that becomes super reach loss.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A variation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), the display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), and FIG. The display result determination table (set value 3) shown in -6 (C), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), and the jackpot type determination shown in FIG. 9-7 (B). In addition to the table (for the second special symbol), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table, the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table, the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table, the normal map display result judgment table (not shown), and the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown). ) Etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit and a small hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. It has become. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 3 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 3, 2, and 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 3 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 3 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the game field side, and the smaller the value in the order of 2 and 1, the more advantageous the value for the game field side.

9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The individual display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability state), the normal state or the time saving state (low). More judgment values are assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" than in the case of "certain state". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability is determined (in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/150 when the set value is 2, and 1/99 when the set value is 3). In comparison, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher (in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, the set value is 1/150, and the set value is If it is 2, it is 1/99, and if the set value is 3, it is 1/50). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the determination value becomes high.

Further, in each display result judgment table, the judgment values are assigned so that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Has been done. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Then, the probability of being determined is set to 1/200. It should be noted that the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit gaming state may be different depending on the set value.

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" or "small hit", and the big hit gaming state or small hit. The probability of being determined to be controlled to the gaming state is low, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" or "small hit", and the big hit game state or small hit game. Judgment values are assigned so that the probability of being determined when the state is controlled is high (big hit probability and small hit probability: set value 3> set value 2> set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C). If any of the hit determination values is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C) indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), a mode in which the winning probability of the small hit is different is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning probability of a small hit is the same regardless of which display result determination table is used (regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1). May be.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit by using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C). However, a big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately for each set value, and it is individually judged whether or not the variation display result is a big hit or a small hit. May be good. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), each display result determination table is assigned a determination value for a small hit, which is shown in FIG. 9-6 (A). The display result determination table (display result determination table referred to when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1) does not have to be assigned a determination value to the small hit. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hit probability differs depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

In the present embodiment, a total of three setting values, 1 to 3, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 2 or 4 or more.

9-7 (A) and 9-7 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 9-7 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 9-7 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-8. In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and the game shifts to the low probability high base state, and the jackpot game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probabilistic jackpot) for shifting to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The big hit game state by "big hit A" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player five times (so-called 5 rounds) and is repeatedly executed. The big hit game state by "B" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state advantageous to the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a big hit game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that the big hit gaming state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball ejection rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When is 1, the ball output rate is the lowest.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. (A judgment value is not assigned to the jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball ejection rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When is 1, the ball output rate is the lowest.

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. In other words, if the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%). Although it is included, even when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, a case may be provided in which the big hit type is determined to be the big hit B. ..

As described above, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. It has become.

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability and the small hit probability increase, and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is determined. The present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. ..

Further, the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the jackpot probability and the small hit probability change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change. The present invention is not limited to this, and the playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the probability change state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability change loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the rate at which the game ball passes through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special map. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as those set in 1 to 3, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided.

Further, in this way, when the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect, and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state).

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the fluctuation display result to "big hit" and the fluctuation display result to be "small hit". A fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits, which is used when it is pre-determined, and a fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss, which is used when it is pre-determined to make the fluctuation display result "miss", are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 9-9 (A) and 9-9 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is a jackpot variation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. The jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) used when the jackpot type is for jackpot B and jackpot C is prepared in advance, and these jackpot fluctuation pattern determination tables (big hit) are prepared in advance. The fluctuation pattern judgment table for (for A) and the jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C) includes the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot. For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", 1 to 997 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. Up to 400 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). When the set value is "2", 1 to 350 of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 351 to 825 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 826 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 300 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 301 to 800 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 801 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. 1 to 100 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), 101 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. When the set value is "2", 1 to 150 of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 151 to 450 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 451 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 200 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 201 to 550 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is higher than that and lowers in the order of set values 3, 2, and 1. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2). It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of the set values 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in the present embodiment, when these determination values are the jackpot type "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and the jackpot type is "big hit A". In this case, the player is assigned so that the super reach α can be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. It is possible to raise the expectation of.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value is the determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, the range of the determination value of MR3 is 0 to 0 regardless of whether the set value is 1, 2, or 3. Of the 997s, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit. The fluctuation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios with the set values 1, 2, and 3.

Further, the variation pattern determination table for loss includes the variation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The variation pattern determination table B for loss used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the variation for loss used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for loss, which is used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed, are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the super reach. A predetermined random value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of β loss.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 1 or less), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701. Up to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", 1 to 400 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 350 of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach corresponding to a total reserved storage number of 2 to 4 are obtained. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for low-base medium total pending storage number 2 to 4), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3. Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", 1 to 450 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach corresponding to a total reserved storage number of 5 to 8 are obtained. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 5 or more), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701. Up to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", 1 to 500 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 450 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss corresponding to the time reduction control (PA1-4). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern (PA2-3) of PA2-2) and super reach β loss.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (D), in the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss (for high base and medium), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", 1 to 500 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 450 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

As described above, when the loss pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than that of determining the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of determining the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher. , The set values 3, 2, and 1 are lowered in this order. When the fluctuation pattern judgment tables A to D for loss are used, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are the fluctuation patterns of super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss regardless of the fluctuation pattern judgment table. When each is assigned to a fluctuation pattern, that is, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so that the fluctuation pattern of the super reach It is possible to prevent the effect from being reduced due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

The "common decision ratio" in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment is different from the one in which the determination ratio is completely the same with different set values (the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment) and different set values. (For example, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach differs by about 1% between the set value 1 and the set value 3).

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation display result is lost, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value set. It may be present, or only the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is a loss, the super reach α is exemplified. The determination ratio of only one of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the loss and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are both regardless of the set value. Is exemplified regardless of the set value set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In the present embodiment, when the variation display result is lost, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach differs depending on the set value is illustrated, but it is set. Depending on the set value, there may be one or a plurality of undetermined fluctuation patterns among the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern. In other words, if the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the fluctuation patterns should not be determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or a specific fluctuation pattern is 100%. It is also included to determine by the ratio of.

The variation time of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the variation of the non-reach loss is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-2). The pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 9-5). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. Occasionally, by winning a start, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening ( By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed because the variable display time becomes long.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (A) to 9-10 (C), variations are made using a variation pattern determination table for loss, which differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the embodiment for determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reserved storage number in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for loss, which differs depending on the number of reserved storages of the special symbol and the number of pending storages of the second special symbol when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss of the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the super reach loss is set regardless of the numerical value of 1 to 3 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The range of random value assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the fluctuation display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss). Appearance rate) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It should be noted that the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the rate at which the variation display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach loss differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The present invention is not limited to this, and in consideration of the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the variable display is super reach loss at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be executed in a fluctuation pattern.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 9-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special drawing holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the variation display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the above, are used as pending data. It is stored until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the variation display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the above, are used as pending data. The number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit is associated with the hold number in the order in which the game balls pass through the passing gate, and is used for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

Random numbers that are not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, and are periodically executed according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Next, the game control main process in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-11 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (122SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (122SGSa002). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014. Further, when the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa003; N), it is further determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (122SGSa004). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a process of protecting the data of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. When the backup flag is OFF and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; Y), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (122SGSa005). .. In 122SGSa005, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data of the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (122SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa005; Y), the CPU 103 sets an effect control board start wait timer for waiting during the period until the effect control board 12 starts (122SGSa006). Then, the value of the effect control board start wait timer is decremented by -1 (122SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board start wait timer has timed out (122SGSa008). If the effect control board start wait start timer is not out of the timer (122SGSa008; N), 122SGSa007 is executed again and the effect control board 12 waits for a period until it starts. Further, when the timer for waiting for the start of the effect control board is out (122SGSa008; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa009).

When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa009; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 122SG090 is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 is open (122SGSa009a). When the open sensor 122SG090 is ON (122SGSa009a; Y), the set value confirmation process for displaying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed on the display monitor 122SG029, and the clerk of the game hall or the like displays it. By visually recognizing the monitor 122SG029, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed (setting change state) (122SGSa010). When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa009; N) or the release sensor is OFF (122SGSa009a; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa011 after the set value confirmation process is executed. That is, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the clear switch is activated without being operated, the set value is confirmed if the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened even if the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. It is impossible.

In 122SGSa011, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 122SGSa021. (122SGSa013).

In 122SGSa014, the CPU 103 sets a timer for waiting for the start of the effect control board to wait for the period until the effect control board 12 starts. Then, the value of the effect control board start wait timer is decremented by -1 (122SGSa015), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board start wait timer has timed out (122SGSa016). If the effect control board activation start wait timer is not out of the timer (122SGSa016; N), 122SGSa015 is executed again and the effect control board 12 is waited for a period until it is activated. When the effect control board start wait timer is out (122SGSa016; Y), the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process (122SGSa017) for clearing the contents of the RAM 102, and then the lock switch 122SG051 is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (122SGSa018).

When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa018; N), the CPU 103 sends a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 and proceeds to 122SGsa021, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started at the cold start (12SGsa018; N). 122SGSa019).

Further, when the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa019; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the release sensor 122SG090 is ON (122SGSa019a). When the open sensor is ON (122SGSa019a; Y), that is, when the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the setting change process for changing the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (122SGSa020). Is executed, and the process proceeds to 122SGSa021. That is, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the clear switch is operated and activated, the set value cannot be changed unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened even if the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. ing.

When the open sensor 122SG090 is OFF in 122SGSa019a, it is assumed that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, and a cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 to proceed to 122SGSa021 (122SGSa019).

In 122SGSa021, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104. Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set (122SGSa022) so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the interrupt is permitted (122SGSa023). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 9-12 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process executed by the CPU 103. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first transmits a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa031), and is stored in the address F001 (see FIG. 9-13 (B)) in the RAM 102. The set value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa032). Then, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033). When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033; N), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the 122SGSa033 to wait until the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF.

When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa051; N), the CPU 103 ends the display of the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa034), and issues a set value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12. It is transmitted and the set value confirmation process is completed (122SGSa035).

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, by ending the setting confirmation state (ending the setting value confirmation process), the state is the same as when starting with a normal hot start, so that the process of 122SGSa035 is performed. The command transmitted to the effect control board 12 may be a hot start notification command.

FIG. 9-13 (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clear process executed by the CPU 103. In the RAM clearing process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041). When the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041; N), it is further determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042). When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; Y), the CPU 103 specifies the second address from the beginning in the RAM 102 and proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa043).

On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; N), the first address in the RAM 102 is specified and the process proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa044).

In 122SGSa045, the CPU 103 sets (stores) "00H" at the specified address. In particular, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), "00H" is set in the address F000, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 automatically sets a value. 1 is set. Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (FXXX described later) (122SGSa046). If the specified address is not the last address in RAM 102 (122SGSa046; N), specify the next address in RAM 102 and proceed to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa047), if the specified address is the last address in RAM 102 (122SGSa046). Y) ends the RAM clearing process.

As shown in FIG. 9-13 (B), the RAM 102 in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment is assigned an address (F000 to FXXX) for each storage area. Of these storage areas, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 is described later. Temporary setting value is stored. Furthermore, at other addresses (F002, F003, etc.), in addition to clear switch backup information that can specify whether or not the clear switch was ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started, special figure hold storage and normal figure hold The storage, the values of various counters, various timers, various flags, and game information including error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are stored. The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among the areas in which other information is stored. Further, a value indicating a factory-shipped state (for example, a set value "0") is set in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state where the value indicating the factory default state is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, or the image may be executed. You may be urged to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process by displaying on the display device 5 or the like.

That is, the RAM clear processing in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment is an address (F001 to FXXX) excluding the address (F000) in which the set value is stored when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102 and there is backup data. ) Clears data other than the set value by storing "00H", but if there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 or there is no backup data, "00H" is stored in all the addresses (F000 to FXXX) in the RAM 102. It is a process to clear all the data including the set value by storing.

In the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, the set value is stored in the address F000 at the beginning of the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102. May be good. When the set value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102 in this way, immediately before the last address of the RAM 102 as the address for clearing the data when the RAM clear process shown in FIG. 9-13 (A) is executed. It is sufficient to specify the address of and store "00H" sequentially from the address F000 to the address immediately before the address.

Further, the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the data excluding the set value of the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, but the present invention is limited to this. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, only the gaming information stored in the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment) is cleared. You may do it.

Further, the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the clear switch backup information is used for game control. A process of storing or reading clear switch backup information in the RAM 102 by storing it in a register of the microcomputer 100 (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register). May be omitted so that the processing load of the CPU 103 can be reduced. When the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the clear switch backup information is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100, so that the clear switch backup information is stored in the CPU 103. It is possible to prevent the process from being overwritten with other information (data).

FIG. 9-14 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by the CPU 103. In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). The set value change start notification command may be transmitted immediately before the set value change process is started (at the timing when the lock switch 122SG051 is determined to be ON in 122SGsa018). Then, the set value stored in the address F000 (see FIG. 9-13 (B)) in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified set value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa053).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054). When the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "1", "2", which is a setting value one step more advantageous to the player than the "1", is set as a temporary setting value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "2", is provisionally set. It is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a set value. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (provisional set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). When there is no operation of the setting changeover switch in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), the process of 122SGSa057 is executed without executing the processes of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 is stored in the address F001 or the process of storing a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102 by repeatedly executing the processes of the 122SGSa054 to 122SGsa056. The process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

When the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 stores the set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 in the address F000. That is, the CPU 103 stores the set value stored in the address F001 (temporary set value displayed in the display monitor 122SG029) in the address F000, so that the set value stored in the address F001 is set as the present set value. (Change the set value of the pachinko game machine 1). Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value designation command according to the setting value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102 and a setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 to end the setting change process. (122SGSa059, 122SGSa060).

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the setting change processing is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the setting value change end notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 within the game control main process (immediately after the setting change process is completed).

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, by turning off the lock switch 122SG051, a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (a temporary set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102). Is illustrated in the address F000), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening, the operation of the clear switch, the pushing operation of the lock switch 122SG051 and the like are exemplified. By turning off the lock switch 122SG051 after executing the operation of, a new set value may be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started from the cold start or is started in the setting change state, the cold start notification command or the setting value change start is sent to the effect control board 12. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clear process is executed before the notification command is transmitted is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear process is a cold start notification to the effect control board 12. It may be executed after sending a command or a setting value change start notification command.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the RAM clear processing is executed before the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear process is executed again after the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed (other than the setting value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102). (Clear the data of). By doing so, it is possible to prevent problems such as the game being started while the invalid data is stored in the RAM.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is started after executing a common RAM clear process (122SGSa017) between the case of starting the pachinko game machine 1 in the cold start and the case of starting it in the setting change state. An example is an example in which a command corresponding to a state (cold start notification command, setting value change start notification command, or setting value change end notification command) is transmitted to the effect control board 12, but the present invention is limited to this. The command according to the activated state (cold start notification command, setting value change start notification command, setting value change) depends on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start or in the setting change state. A common RAM clear process may be executed after the end notification command) is transmitted to the effect control board 12.

Next, the game control timer interrupt processing in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 9-15, the CPU 103 first executes the power supply cutoff detection process (122SGS020) in the game control timer interrupt process, and then executes the switch process (S21) to the command control process (S27). .. As shown in FIGS. 9-16, in the power supply cutoff detection process, the CPU 103 first receives an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less. Is determined (122SGSa051). If there is no power off signal input (122SGSa051; N), the process ends, and if there is a power off signal input (122SGSa051; Y), the backup data including the set value stored in the RAM 102 is specified. (122SGS053), the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 102 (122SGS053). Then, after creating check data to be used when recovering the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS054), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

Next, the effect control main process in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (122SGS401a) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and CTC (counter / timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Set the register of the circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (122SGS401b). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer according to the reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (122SGS402). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by -1 (122SGS403), and it is determined whether or not the command reception waiting timer has timed out (122SGS404). When the command reception waiting timer is timered out (122SGS404; N), the processes of 122SGS403 and 122SGS404 are repeatedly executed, and the command reception waiting timer waits until the timer is out.

Then, when the command reception waiting timer goes out (122SGS404; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hot start notification command is received (122SGS405). When the hot start notification command is received (122SGS405; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored from power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player in the player information input processing described later). After receiving the input of information, the information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 is cleared) and the process proceeds to 122SGS417 (122SGS406).

When the hot start notification command is not received (122SGS405; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cold notification command is received (122SGS407). When the cold notification command is received (122SGS407; Y), the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations and the number of big hits stored in the RAM 122 since the last start of the pachinko gaming machine 1). (Information including the number of times of super reach) was cleared (122SGS408), and the information stored in the RAM 102 was cleared, and the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 were cleared. The RAM clear notification process for performing the notification (execution of the RAM clear notification) is executed (122SGS409). In the RAM clear notification process, the image display on the image display device 5, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, etc. are performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. It suffices if it is possible to notify the clerk of the game hall or the like that the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. Then, after the RAM clear notification process is executed, the process proceeds to 122SGS417.

Further, when the cold start notification command is not received (122SGS407; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value change start notification command is received (122SGS410). When the setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, notification that the setting value change operation is in progress (notification during setting value change). ) Is being executed while the setting value is being changed (122SGS411). In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the game machine frame 122SG003 is generally open, and the clerk of the game hall or the like who changes the setting value is the main board 11. The display monitor 122SG029 mounted on the machine is being visually recognized. That is, the setting change state is a state in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by the clerk of the game hall who changes the set value, so that the clerk of the game hall displays the image. From the display of the device 5, it is considered that it is not possible to determine whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state. Therefore, as a notification during the setting value change, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state to the clerk of the game hall who changes the set value by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light emission of the game effect lamp 9. All you have to do is notify that you are doing so.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value change end notification command and the set value designation command have been received, that is, whether or not the set value of the set value has been completed (122SGS412). When the setting value change end notification command and the setting value specification command are received (122SGS412), the setting value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the received setting value specification command (setting stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102) is received. (Value) is specified, and the specified set value is updated and stored in the RAM 122 as set value information (values of "1" to "3" according to the set value) (122SG413). Then, after executing the above-mentioned processes of 122SGS408 and 122SGS409, the process proceeds to 122SGS417. If at least one of the set value change end notification command and the set value specification command is not received (122SGS412; N), the processes of 122SGS411 and 122SGS412 are repeatedly executed.

Note that the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the RAM 122 is cleared after the setting value changing notification is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value changing notification is used. RAM 122 may be cleared in parallel. If the clearing of the RAM 122 is completed during the execution of the setting value changing notification, the RAM clear notification may be executed in parallel with the setting value changing notification, or the RAM is cleared after the setting value changing notification is completed. Notification may be executed.

Further, when the setting value change start notification command is not received (122SGS410; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value confirmation start notification command is received, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state. It is determined whether or not it has been started (122SGS414). When the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (122SGS414; Y), the setting value confirmation notification process for notifying that the setting confirmation state (the setting value can be confirmed from the display monitor 122SG029) is performed. Execute (122SGS415). In the notification processing during confirmation of the set value, the clerk of the game hall who started the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying the image on the image display device 5, emitting the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, etc. It suffices if it is possible to notify the surroundings of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the setting is confirmed. If the effect control CPU 120 does not receive the setting value confirmation end notification command (122SGS410; N), it proceeds to the processing of the 122SGS405, and proceeds to the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change start notification command, and the setting. It waits until any command of the value confirmation start notification command is received (the processing of 122SGS405, 122SGS407, 122SGS410, 122SGS414 is repeatedly executed).

As described above, in the effect control main process in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-18, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start state or the setting change state, the player information ( While clearing the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. since the input of the player information is received from the RAM 122, the information for directing (the number of fluctuations since the previous start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of big hits, etc.) The RAM 122 does not clear the setting value information (a numerical value of any of "1" to "3" corresponding to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) and the setting value information (such as the number of times of super reach). Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, but the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the set value information is the set value information already stored in the RAM 122. It is designed to be overwritten (updated and stored).

That is, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting confirmation state, or setting change state.

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state. Illustrates a form in which the player information and the effect information are not cleared, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, the game is played. The person information and the production information may be cleared.

Returning to FIG. 9-17, in 122SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 identifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command is received, and displays an image. The device 5 starts displaying the initial symbol corresponding to the received command. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-19, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a setting value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a new setting value. If it is not set, the display of the decorative symbol is started on the image display device 5 with a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left as the initial symbol. Further, when the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 is displayed as an initial symbol from the left. The display of the decorative pattern is started by the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

In the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, if there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 has "4" and "5" as initial symbols from the left. , And "6" are used to illustrate a form in which the display of the decorative pattern is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value advantageous to the player (for example, "1") is used. When set, the setting value that is disadvantageous to the player is a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as the initial symbol at a higher rate than when (for example, "3") is set. It may be displayed. By doing so, it can be suggested that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set with a set value advantageous to the player, and the gaming interest can be improved.

In the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, if there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 has "4" and "5" as initial symbols from the left. , And "6" are used to illustrate a form in which the display of the decorative pattern is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value advantageous to the player (for example, "1") is used. The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different depending on whether the set value is set or a set value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "3") is set. Further, depending on whether a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set or a setting value disadvantageous to the player (for example, "3") is set, the speakers 8L and 8R are used. The volume of the output sound, the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be different.

Then, returning to FIG. 9-17, the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” in the pre-reading restriction counter in order to regulate the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the first four fluctuations (122SGS418). After that, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (122SGS419). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (122SGS420) and executes the following processing.

First, the effect control CPU 120 executes a start notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started (122SGS421). In the activation notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interruption is the first interruption from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko game machine 1, specify which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command has been received, and then specify which of the interrupts has been received. The start notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and the start notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. Then, after starting the start notification process timer, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started based on the value of the start notification process timer and the start notification process table by executing the start notification process in the next interruption or later. All you have to do is execute the notification.

In the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, the command received at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value confirmation end notification command. The mode of the activation notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different depending on the presence or absence.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when the hot start notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is new. If the set value is not set, the gaming effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound A for 30 seconds. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds. The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

Further, when the cold start notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, when a new setting value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. The game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound B for 30 seconds. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same as the output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, but the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds. The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

That is, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the gaming effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L, 8R for 30 seconds. Output sound of A is executed, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, the effect control CPU 120 emits light of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output sound of the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Includes both performing the output of B.

Further, when the setting value change end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming effect. The lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds, the output sound C is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value has been changed). To execute. Although the light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

In particular, when the setting value change end notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

That is, the special control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the gaming effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds. It refers to the output of C and the display of the message image for 40 seconds in the image display device 5.

As described above, since the light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output start timing of the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display start timing of the image display device 5 are the same, these pachinko games Regarding the notification mode when the machine 1 is started, the notification period is 60 seconds when the hot start notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the hot start), and the cold start notification command. Is received (when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start), the notification period is 60 seconds, and when the setting value change end notification command is received (when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the setting changed state). The period is 40 seconds.

The feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the activation notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated is executed by using the gaming effect lamps 9, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall or a counter for each machine, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. As a start notification at the time of this, a signal that can identify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in any of the hot start, cold start, setting change state, and setting confirmation state, the device that executes the start notification is partially common. Although a certain form (in each case, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed) is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot. The device that executes the start notification differs depending on whether it is started in the start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the cold start, the image display device 5 is used. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the setting changed, a signal may be output from the above-mentioned external output terminal to the management device, etc.).

Further, the notification mode of each device that executes the activation notification may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a cold start, all the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are made to emit light, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated with the setting changed. In this case, only a part of the game effect lamp 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made to emit light.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is in the open state, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (to the pachinko gaming machine 1). If three or more speakers are provided, sound is output only from some of the speakers), and if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is closed. Since there are many cases, the sound may be output from all the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as "setting is being changed", while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, the image display device 5 may display a message image indicating that the RAM 102 or the RAM 122 has been cleared, such as "RAM has been cleared".

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of the above-mentioned external output terminals, the terminals for outputting signals to the management device may be different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the period until the setting value change is completed (until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value specification command is received) as the notification during the setting value change. A signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over a period of time), and after the change of the setting value is completed, a signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear as a RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear as the RAM clear notification.

When the external output terminal is used in common for each notification, the timing of outputting the signal to the management device may be different according to each notification.

As described above, the activation notification process exemplifies a mode in which the activation notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 differs depending on the received command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these pachinko gaming machines 1 are not limited thereto. The activation notification of may be executed in the notification mode of 1 regardless of the received command. Further, the start notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 exemplifies a mode in which it is executed regardless of which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the set value change end notification command is received. The present invention is not limited to this, and among these hot start notification commands, cold start notification commands, set value confirmation end notification commands, and set value change end notification commands, even if they are received, the pachinko gaming machine 1 A command that does not execute the start notification may be provided.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, as an initialization effect in the present invention, a different mode of activation notification is executed according to a command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The mode of activation notification and the combination of decorative symbols may be all different depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or only a part thereof may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or is started in a setting confirmation state, these start notifications are given. May not be executed.

Returning to FIG. 9-17, the effect control CPU 120 then executes the power supply cutoff detection process (122SGS422). In the power supply cutoff detection process, as shown in FIG. 9-22, the effect control CPU 120 first has an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less. It is determined whether or not (122SGS431). If there is no power cutoff signal input (122SGS431; N), the process ends, and if there is a power cutoff signal input (122SGS431; Y), the set value information, player information, etc. stored in the RAM 122 are input. The backup data to be included is specified (122SGS432), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (122SGS433). Then, after creating check data to be used when recovering the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS434), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

Returning to FIG. 9-17, the effect control CPU 120 then analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 122SGS423). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the contents of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the receive command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIG. 9-3) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control process process (122SGS424). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

Next, a random number update process for effect (122SGS425) that updates the count value of the counter for generating a random number for effect such as a random number for determining a jackpot symbol, a player information input process (122SGS426) that accepts input of player information, and a game. The player information output process (122SGS427) for outputting the person information and the effect information aggregation process (122SGS428) for aggregating the effect information are executed. After that, it shifts to S52.

In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 uses a password (a password generated in advance by an external server in which the player's game information is stored) by operating the player's stick controller 31A or push button 31B. The player can access the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and receive the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. as the player information stored each time the variation display, the jackpot game, and the super reach are executed.

In the player information output processing, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the player's stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and the two-dimensional code. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, after the display of the two-dimensional code is completed, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player can read the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 on a mobile terminal such as a smartphone, and transmit the player information aggregated in this game to an external server to play the pachinko game machine. The cumulative player information in 1 can be stored in the server.

In the effect information aggregation process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 as effect information each time the variation display, the jackpot game, and the super reach are executed. do.

Next, the effect control process processing in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-22, in the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is “0” (122SGS441). When the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is "0" (122SGS441; Y), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag after executing the look-ahead advance notice setting process (S161). Execute the process.

Further, when the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is any one of "1" to "4" (122SGS441; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (122SGS442). ). When the value of the effect control process flag is any of "0", "2" to "7" (122SGS442; N), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag. When the process is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (122SGS442; Y), the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is decremented by -1 (122SGS443), and S170 to S177 (S170 to S177) are set according to the effect control process flag. (See FIG. 7), any of the processes is executed. By executing the processes of 122SGS441 to 122SGS443 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after the start-up, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted until the variation display is executed four times.

In the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the variation display is performed four times. Although the embodiment of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 performs the start winning prize determination process based on the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1. By not executing (see 5), the execution of the pre-reading notice effect may be restricted over the four variable displays.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the cold start or in the setting change state, the gaming progress is involved based on the fact that the gaming is possible. As a setting, a mode in which the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted over four variable displays is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is set whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start. Based on the fact that the game is possible regardless of whether it is started in the changed state, the settings related to the progress of the game depend on the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9, and the RTC. The setting of the effect may be set to the state at the time of shipment from the factory.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the effect control CPU 120 is the super reach A or the super reach B as the first suggestion effect. It is possible to execute the reach effect and the reach effect of Super Reach C and Super Reach D as the second suggestion effect, and when executing the reach effect of Super Reach C and Super Reach D, the Super Reach C is performed. Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach production of the super reach C or the super reach D is notified from the start of the reach production of the super reach D, the notification of the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach production can be executed, and the production effect. Can be improved.

The present embodiment also includes the invention 122SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as pachinko gaming machines, for example, there are those described in JP-A-2016-4-2880 and those described in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-20092, when the gaming machine is turned on and started (power supply to the gaming machine is started). (When), a command (control information) output from the main board to the effect control board (effect control means) in order to restore the gaming machine based on the memory that the main board (game control board) is backed up. And, regardless of the memory that the main board is backed up, the command output from the main board to the effect control board in order to clear the backed up memory, and the state in which the setting value of the gaming machine can be changed. If the command output from the main board to the effect control board is the same, the effect control board will be appropriate according to the activation state when the gaming machine is turned on and started. There was a problem that various processes could not be executed. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the invention 122SG that solves the problem.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) by performing a predetermined operation executes a setting change process shown in FIGS. 9-14. The part to do) and
A game control means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) which can control the progress of the game and can execute the control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means. The part to do) and
A backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) that can retain the stored contents for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
The effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can clear the RAM shown in FIG. 9-17) capable of controlling the effect based on the control information output from the game control means (for example, the effect control command shown in FIG. 9-3). Notification processing, setting value changing notification processing, setting value confirmation notification processing, etc.) and
Equipped with
The first activation of the gaming control means is restored based on the storage contents stored in the backup storage means as an activation state when the power supply to the gaming machine is started after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. It is possible to set the state (for example, hot start), the second activation state (for example, cold start) in which the stored contents are erased and restored regardless of the stored contents stored in the backup storage means, and the setting means. It becomes one of the third activation states (for example, the setting change state), and different control information corresponding to the activation state is output to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-14). When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the hot start, the CPU 103 sends a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the cold start, the CPU 103 is the effect control board. When a cold start notification command is sent to 12 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the CPU 103 sends a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the effect control means can execute appropriate processing according to the activation state of the game control means when the power supply is started. ..

Furthermore, as means 2 of the invention 122SG,
A storage means for effect control (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the effect control means is provided.
Of the information stored in the effect control storage means, the information to be erased differs depending on whether the activation state to which the control information corresponds is the second activation state or the third activation state (the information stored in the effect control storage means is different). For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-18, the information cleared from the RAM 102 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting confirmation state, or setting change state).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to perform appropriate erasing according to the activation state.

Furthermore, as means 3 of the invention 122SG,
The game control means can output control information (for example, a set value change end notification command) that specifies the end of the third activation state.
The effect control means performs special control according to the end of the third activated state based on the output of the control information designating the end of the third activated state (for example, shown in FIG. 9-20). As described above, based on the reception of the setting value change end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 emits light for 40 seconds from the game effect lamp 9 and outputs sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the activation notification process. Then, the image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value has been changed).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to recognize that the third activation state in which the set value can be set has ended by the special control.

Furthermore, as means 4 of the invention 122SG,
When the control information corresponding to the first activation state or the second activation state is output, the effect control means performs specific control according to the output (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, hot). Based on the reception of the start notification command and the cold start notification command, the effect control CPU 120 executes the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the start notification process).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to recognize that the set value cannot be set in the activated state by the specific control.

Furthermore, as means 5 of the invention 122SG,
The effect control means performs different control depending on the activation state to which the control information corresponds (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, the effect control CPU 120 receives the hot start notification command. In the start notification process, the CPU 120 for effect control is based on the part that executes the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the cold start notification command. For effect control based on the part that executes the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the activation notification process and the reception of the setting value change end notification command. A portion in which the CPU 120 emits light from the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, outputs an output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and executes a message image for 40 seconds on the image display device 5 in the activation notification process. As shown in -19, based on the reception of the hot start notification command or cold start notification command, the decorative symbol is displayed as a combination of "1", "2", and "3" as the initial symbol, or the set value. The part where the decorative symbol is displayed as a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as the initial symbol based on the reception of the change end notification command)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize which activated state it is in.

Furthermore, as means 6 of the invention 122SG,
When the set value is changed in the third activation state, the game control means erases the backup information stored in the backup storage means except for specific information (for example, variant 122SG-1). As shown in FIG. 9-23, the RAM clear processing is executed based on the change of the set value, and the data after the address F001 excluding the data of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is cleared. part)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to execute appropriate erasure of backup information in response to a change in a set value.

Furthermore, as means 7 of the invention 122SG,
A game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control the progress of the game is provided.
The timing for erasing at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means differs between the first activated state and the second activated state (for example, as shown in the modified example 122SG-4). When starting the gaming machine 1 with a cold start, the RAM clear processing is executed at the timing before the cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the setting changed. , The part that executes the RAM clear process at the timing after the set value change start notification command is sent to the effect control board 12)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to execute the erasure of the gaming information at an appropriate timing according to the activation state.

The present embodiment also includes the invention 123SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as pachinko gaming machines, for example, there are those described in JP-A-2016-4-2880 and those described in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-20092, when the gaming machine is turned on and started (power supply to the gaming machine is started). When), the main board clears the backed up memory regardless of the backed up memory (general startup state), and the setting value of the gaming machine can be changed (setting startup state). If the notification modes are the same, it is not possible to specify whether the gaming machine is in the general activation state or the setting activation state, and there is a problem that it is difficult to detect unauthorized setting changes of the gaming machine. rice field. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the invention 123SG that solves the problem.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) by performing a predetermined operation executes a setting change process shown in FIGS. 9-14. The part to do) and
A game control means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) which can control the progress of the game and can execute the control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means. The part to do) and
A backup storage means (for example, RAM 102 or RAM 122) that can retain the stored contents for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
A start notification means capable of notifying the start state of the game control means when the power supply to the game machine is started (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the start notification process shown in FIGS. 9-17).
Equipped with
The game control means is based on a general activation state (for example, a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a hot start) in which the backup storage means is cleared and activated as the activation state, and the setting means. It has a setting activation state (for example, a setting change state) that enables the setting, and has a setting activation state (for example, a setting change state).
The activation notification means performs the notification in different modes in the general activation state and the setting activation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start). , The light emission of the game effect lamp and the sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R are executed, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, the light emission of the game effect lamp, the sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the image The part that executes the display of the message image on the display device 5)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily identify whether the starting state is the general starting state or the setting starting state, so that fraud due to the setting can be easily detected. ..

Furthermore, as means 2 of the invention 123SG,
The activation notification means can execute various notifications according to the priority.
The priority of the notification of the setting activation state is higher than the priority of the notification of the general activation state (for example, as shown in the modification 122SG-5, during execution of the notification during the change of the setting value having a high priority, the notification is being executed. The part that prevents RAM clear notification with low priority from being executed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, since the notification of the setting activation state is prioritized, it is possible to prevent the fraud due to the setting from being undetectable.

Furthermore, as means 3 of the invention 123SG,
The activation notification means notifies the set activation state and the general activation state in different notification periods (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start, the notification period is 60 seconds, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 The notification period is 40 seconds when the device is started with the settings changed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, appropriate notification can be executed in a period corresponding to the activation state.

Furthermore, as means 4 of the invention 123SG,
The activation notification means is
It has a first notification means (for example, an image display device 5) and a second notification means (for example, a game effect lamp 9 and speakers 8L, 8R) different from the first notification means.
The setting activation state is notified by the first notification means (for example, a portion for displaying a message image on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9-20).
The general activation state is notified by the second notification means (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, a portion that executes light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, since the activation notification is executed by different notification means, it is possible to easily recognize which activation state is in.

Furthermore, as means 5 of the invention 123SG,
The game control means is a game control (for example, a game control by a setting common as a setting related to the game progress between the game enable state after the set activation state and the game enable state after the general activation state. A game characterized in that the CPU 103 does not execute the start winning determination process after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, so that it is possible to execute (a part that restricts the execution of the pre-reading notice effect up to four variable displays). The machine is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience such as recognition that the setting has been changed by executing the game control with different settings.

The present embodiment also includes the invention 124SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-137351. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-137351, if the gaming information is unintentionally deleted due to a change in the set value, the store or the player in which the gaming machine is installed may find it. There is a risk of giving a disadvantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the invention 124SG that solves the problem.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) by performing a predetermined operation executes a setting change process shown in FIGS. 9-14. The part to do) and
A game control means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) which can control the progress of the game and can execute the control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means. The part to do) and
A game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control the progress of the game, and
Notification means capable of notifying in advance that the game information stored in the game information storage means will be erased (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the set value change confirmation notification process in the modification 122SG-1). When,
Equipped with
The game control means erases at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means when a new set value is set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 is a modification 122SG-1). The part that executes the RAM clear processing shown in),
The predetermined operation includes a setting change start operation (for example, an operation of turning on the clear switch), a setting change operation (for example, an operation of turning on the setting changeover switch 122SG052), and a setting change completion operation (for example, turning off the lock switch 122SG051). Operation) and including
The setting means can perform the setting change operation by performing the setting change start operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modification 122SG-1, the CPU 103 has a clear switch ON. After the determination (122SGSa054a; Y), the process of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056 can be executed), and the setting change completion operation is performed after the possible setting change operation, so that the setting change operation is performed. A portion in which the set value is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modification 122SG-1, the CPU 103 determines that the lock switch is OFF (122SGSa057; N) and then executes the processing of the 122SGSa058. ),
The notification means executes the notification when the setting change start operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-24 as a modification 122SG-1, the effect control CPU 120 starts the first setting value change. The part that executes the set value change confirmation notification process based on the determination that the notification command has been received (122SGS410; Y))
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gaming information from being unintentionally deleted by changing the set value.

Furthermore, as means 2 of the invention 124SG,
When the setting change completion operation is performed without performing the setting change operation after the setting change start operation is performed, the game control means stores the game information stored in the game information storage means. It is determined that the lock switch 122SG051 is further turned off after the CPU 103 determines that the setting changeover switch is not operated (122SGSa054d; N) without erasing (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modification 122SG-1). If it is determined, based on the fact that the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), the set value change process is completed without executing the RAM clear process (122SGSa060). Part to do)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by erasing the gaming information even though the set value is not changed. be able to.

Furthermore, as means 3 of the invention 124SG,
The notification means can notify that the game information is not erased by the game control means when the predetermined operation is completed without performing the setting change completion operation (for example, as a modification 122SG-1). As shown in FIG. 9-25, the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5 by the effect control CPU 120 executing the set value change confirmation notification process).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the operator can recognize an operation method for preventing the gaming information from being erased, so that the gaming information is unintentionally described. It is possible to further prevent it from being erased.

Furthermore, as means 4 of the invention 124SG,
The game control means is stored in the game information storage means when the erasing condition is satisfied and a predetermined confirmation operation is performed when the power supply to the game machine is started. After erasing at least a part of the information (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-11, the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003; Y) in the game control main process, the RAM clear process (122SGSa017) is executed. Part to do),
The notification means also performs the notification even when the deletion condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-26 as a modification 122SG-2, the message image 122SG005M2 is displayed on the image display device 5. part)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gaming information from being unintentionally deleted.

Furthermore, as means 5 of the invention 124SG,
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling the effect based on the control information output from the game control means.
An effect control storage means (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the effect control means, and
A selection means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of selecting whether or not to execute erasing in the effect control storage means, and
Equipped with
When the erasing condition is satisfied when the power supply to the game machine is started and the selection means selects not to execute the erasing in the effect control storage means, the game information storage is performed. Erase conditions when at least a part of the game information stored in the means is erased (for example, a part that clears only RAM 102 as shown in the modification 122SG-3) and power supply to the game machine is started. Is satisfied, and when it is selected by the selection means to execute the erasure in the effect control storage means, at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means is erased. At the same time, at least a part of the information stored in the effect control storage means is erased (for example, a portion that clears both the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 as shown in the modified example 122SG-3).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, whether or not to perform erasing in the game information storage means and erasure of the effect control storage means when the erasing condition is satisfied. Can be selected.

Although the feature portion 122SG in the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and there are changes and additions within the range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Even included in the present invention.

For example, in the feature unit 122SG of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the clear switch is ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the RAM clear process (122SGSa017) is executed and then the lock switch. Although the setting change process (122SGSa020) is executed when the 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa018; Y) to enable the pachinko gaming machine 1 to set a new setting value, the present invention is limited to this. If the clear switch is ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, it is determined first whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON, and if the lock switch 122SG051 is ON, in the setting change process. The RAM clear process may be executed based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In this way, when the RAM clear processing is executed based on the setting of a new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change processing, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modification 122SG-1. In the setting change processing, the CPU 103 first transmits a first setting value change notification command indicating that the CPU 103 has started executing the setting change processing to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). Next, the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified set value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a), and when the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa054a; N), further determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (12SGsa051). 122SGSa054b). When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa054b; Y), the processes of 122SGSa054a and 122SGSa054b are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the clear switch is ON or the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF. When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF, the setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 to end the setting change process (122SGS061).

When the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a; Y), the CPU 103 issues a second setting value change start notification command indicating that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch 122SG052. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa054c), and it is determined whether or not the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d).

When the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d; Y), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "1", "2", which is a setting value one step more advantageous to the player than the "1", is set as a temporary setting value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "2", is provisionally set. It is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a set value. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (provisional set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). When there is no operation of the setting changeover switch in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), the process of 122SGSa057 is executed without executing the processes of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 is stored in the address F001 or the process of storing a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102 by repeatedly executing the processes of 122SGSa054d to 122SGsa056. The process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

Further, when the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value (temporary set value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a). If the set value (temporary set value) is not stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102, that is, if the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off without operating the setting changeover switch 122SG052, a setting value change end notification command is produced. It is transmitted to the control board 12 to end the setting change process (122SGS061).

On the other hand, when the set value (temporary set value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a; Y), the set value stored in the address F000 and the set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102. (122SGSa057b), and it is determined whether or not the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c). When the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), that is, when the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed, the setting value change end notification command is directed and controlled. It is transmitted to the board 12 to end the setting change process (122SGS061).

Further, when different setting values are stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; N), that is, when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, it is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102. The set value is stored in the address F000, that is, the set value stored in the address F001 is stored as the main set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (122SGSa058).

Then, a setting value designation command corresponding to the set value (the set value of the newly set pachinko gaming machine 1) stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa059), and the RAM is cleared. The process is executed (122SGSa060). The RAM clear process (122SGSa060) executes the same process as the RAM clear process described with reference to FIG. 9-13, and is stored in the data (stored after the address F001) excluding the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102. Data) is cleared. After the RAM clear processing (122SGSa060) is executed, the setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 to end the setting change processing (122SGS061).

FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing a part of the effect control main process in the modified example 122SG-1. In the effect control main process in the modification 122SG-1, the effect control CPU 120 changes the first set value when it is determined that the cold start notification command is not received (122SGS407; N), as shown in FIG. 9-24. It is determined whether or not the start notification command has been received (122SGS410a). If the first set value change start notification command is not received (122SGS410a; N), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17), and if the first setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410a; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17). , The set value change confirmation notification process is executed (122SGS410b), and by changing the set value in the image display device 5, the game information etc. stored in the RAM 102 is cleared, or if the set value is not changed, the lock is displayed. The instruction to turn off the switch 122SG051 is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1 (see FIG. 9-25 (A)).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second set value change start notification command is received (122SGS410c). When the second set value change start notification command is not received (122SGS410C; N), it is further determined whether or not the set value change end notification command is received (122SGS410d). When the setting value change end notification command is not received (122SGS410d; N), the processes of 122SGS410b to 122SGS410d are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the first setting value change start notification command or the setting value change end notification command is received. If the setting value change end notification command is received (122SGS410d; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17).

Further, when the second set value change start notification command is received (122SGS410c; Y), the effect control CPU 120 executes the set value changing notification process for notifying that the setting value change operation is in progress. (122SGS411), it is determined whether or not the set value change end notification command is received (122SGS411a). When the setting value change end notification command is not received (122SGS411a; N), the processes of 122SG411 and 122SGS411a are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the setting value change end notification command is received. Then, when the set value change end notification command is received (122SGS411a; Y), it is determined whether or not the set value designation command is received (122SGS411b). If the setting value specification command is not received (122SGS411b; N), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17), and if the setting value specification command is received (122SGS411b; Y), the received setting value specification command is used. The set value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the set value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102) is specified, and the specified set value is set value information (“1” to “3” according to the set value. (Value of 122) is updated and stored in the RAM 122 (122SG413). Then, the process proceeds to 122SGS408 (see FIG. 9-17).

As described above, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process, and the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process, so that the pachinko game machine with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 turned on by the clerk of the game hall or the like. When 1 is activated, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (A), the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102 are cleared by changing the set value in the image display device 5, and the set value is changed. If not, the instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1.

When the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the clerk of the game hall turns off the lock switch 122SG051, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (B), the pachinko gaming machine 1 The decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as an initial symbol in a combination of "1", "2", and "3" without changing the set value of and without clearing the RAM 102. On the other hand, when the clerk of the game hall turns on the clear switch again while the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5, the pachinko game machine 1 is as shown in FIG. 9-25 (C). Is in the setting change state, and it is notified that the setting value is being changed by displaying an image on the image display device 5, emitting light from the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the like.

Then, when the clerk of the game hall turns off the lock switch 122SG051 without setting a new set value in the setting change state, or the clerk of the game hall or the like sets the new set value and is the same as the original set value. When the set value is set and the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (D), the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed and the RAM 102 is cleared. Instead, the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as an initial symbol in a combination of "1", "2", and "3". Further, when the clerk of the amusement park sets a new set value (changes the set value) and turns off the lock switch 122SG051 in the setting change state, the set value is as shown in FIG. 9-25 (E). The RAM 102 is cleared based on the change, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as the initial symbol.

Further, in the modification 122SG-1, the set value is changed to the image display device 5 by starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 turned on by a clerk of the game hall or the like. Illustrates the mode in which the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102 are cleared and the instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 when the set value is not changed is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1. The image is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 9-26 as a modified example 122SG-2, an image is displayed by activating the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the clear switch turned on by a clerk at the amusement park or the like. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the device 5 with a cold start to clear the game information stored in the RAM 102, or if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not started with a cold start, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted. The instruction to perform the above may be displayed as the message image 122SG005M2.

By doing so, for example, when a clerk of a game hall tries to start the pachinko game machine 1 with a hot start and accidentally turns on the clear switch, the pachinko game machine 1 starts with a cold start. It is possible to prevent the game information stored in the RAM 102 from being unintentionally cleared.

Further, in the modified example 122SG-1 and the modified example 122SG-2, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state or in the cold start, the message image 122SG005M1 and the message image 122SG005M2 are displayed on the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM 102 is cleared by displaying a message on the image display device 5. Whether or not it is confirmed may be performed only when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state or when it is started by the cold start, or both may be performed.

Further, in the modification 122SG-1, the set value is changed to the image display device 5 by starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 turned on by a clerk of the game hall or the like. Illustrates the mode in which the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102 are cleared and the instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 when the set value is not changed is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1. The RAM 102 is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 9-27 as a modification 122SG-3, the RAM 102 is cleared based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and the set value is changed. If this is the case, whether or not to clear the RAM 122 according to the fact that the set value has been changed in the image display device 5 or that the RAM 102 has been cleared, and that the set value has been changed or that the RAM 102 has been cleared has been cleared. The message image 122SG005M3 including the options may be displayed, and the selection of whether or not to clear the RAM 122 may be accepted by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

When clearing the RAM 122 is selected by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the effect control CPU 120 clears the information other than the set value information in the RAM 122 by executing the RAM clear process (resulting in this). If you do not select to clear RAM 122 by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the RAM 122 will not be cleared (as a result, only the RAM 102 will be cleared).

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started at the same timing (cold start notification command and setting for the effect control board 12) depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the cold start state or in the setting change state. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clear process is executed at the timing before the value change start notification command is transmitted) is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 122SG-4, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the pachinko machine 1 is started in the cold start, the RAM clear process is executed at the timing before the cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the effect control is performed. Timing after sending the setting value change start notification command to the board 12 (more specifically, after sending the setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12, that is, the setting value change is completed. The timing of clearing the RAM 102 may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the cold start state or in the setting change state, such as by executing the RAM clear process later).

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 are always cleared depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the cold start state or in the setting change state. An example is a mode in which a RAM clear notification process is executed in order to notify (execute a RAM clear notification), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 122SG-5, a pachinko game When the machine 1 is started in the setting change state to notify that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being changed (the notification during the setting value change is executed), the RAM clear notification is not executed, etc. When the high priority notification (for example, the setting value changing notification) is executed, the low priority notification (for example, RAM clear notification) may not be executed.

When the priority is set for each notification in this way, the low priority notification may be executed after the high priority notification is executed. In this case, the low-priority notification is executed in a shorter period than when the high-priority notification is not executed, so that the period for executing the notification is prevented from becoming long. You may.

Further, although the feature unit 122SG in the above embodiment does not perform any setting for the movable body 32 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. At the time, the operation for confirming whether or not the movable body 32 operates normally may be executed in parallel with the above-mentioned RAM clear notification, setting value changing notification, setting value confirmation notification, and various activation notifications. .. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or a cold start, the start notification is executed for 60 seconds, so that the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 can be executed during the start notification. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the set value is changed in addition to the start notification for 40 seconds. Therefore, the movable body 32 is being changed during the change of these setting values and during the start notification for 40 seconds. Confirmation operation can be executed.

The confirmation operation of the movable body 32 may be executed from the time when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, regardless of the activation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, and the like. The setting value change start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, the setting value confirmation start notification command, the setting value confirmation end notification command, and the like may be executed from the time when the effect control CPU 120 (effect control board 12) receives the command. Further, when the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is executed from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command, that is, the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is executed while the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. In this case, even if an error in the confirmation operation occurs, the execution of the notification during the change of the set value may be prioritized, and the error notification in the confirmation operation may not be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, by setting a new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the new setting value is directly reflected in the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a new setting value is set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once restarted (pachinko gaming). The new set value may be reflected in the game by activating the machine 1 by hot start). When the new setting value is reflected in the game by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is performed. After slightly moving the movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position, a confirmation operation that can be performed in a relatively short period of time, such as moving the movable body 32 to the origin position again, is executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 When restarting, as a confirmation operation of the movable body 32, it takes a relatively long period of time such as moving the movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position and then moving the movable body 32 to the origin position again. You may perform the action. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the period required for the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the above-described embodiment, the set value stored in the address F000 is disclosed as specific information that is not cleared from the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this and is cleared from the RAM 102. The specific information that is not performed may include RTC settings, error history, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which a set value as specific information that is not cleared, a temporary set value as information to be cleared, a game information, and the like are stored in the RAM 102 has been exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, for example, two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100, one RAM stores specific information that cannot be cleared such as a set value, and the other RAM stores a temporary set value and a game. Cleared information such as information may be stored. By doing so, the RAM (temporary setting value, game information, etc.) on the other side is stored according to whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. It is possible to make a difference whether or not to clear the RAM). Further, an area for storing specific information that is not cleared and an area for storing information that is cleared may be provided in the RAM 102.

Further, when two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100 as described above, a RAM (Static Randam Access Memory) to which a backup battery is connected is connected to a RAM for storing specific information such as set values that cannot be cleared. On the other hand, by using FeRAM (Ferroelectric Randam Access Memory) as the RAM in which temporary set values and game information are stored, it is possible to reliably clear data that is more important than other data such as set values. You may be able to remember it without having to.

Further, in the feature portion 122SG of the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the clear switch is mounted on the power supply board is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the clear switch is the main board 11. It may be mounted on. By doing so, it is not necessary to newly attach a clear switch to the existing power supply board, so that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above embodiment, the embodiment in which the display monitor 122SG029 for displaying the set value is mounted on the main board 11 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main board is not limited thereto. A display monitor 122SG029 may be provided in the vicinity of the setting changeover switch 122SG052 in No. 11 to facilitate the operation of changing the set value.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above embodiment, an embodiment in which a display monitor 122SG029 for displaying a set value is mounted on the main board 11 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game is not limited to this. If the machine 1 can calculate the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the like, the calculated bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio may be displayed on the display monitor 122SG029.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by providing the display monitor 122SG029 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 on the main board 11 is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed by using a monitor (7-segment monitor) mounted on the payout control board, a reset button, or the like.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the CPU 103 exemplifies a mode in which the setting value change start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, it is the same as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the cold start. Since the RAM clear process (122SGSa017) is executed, both the set value change start notification command and the cold start notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the embodiment, the set value 1 is set to the most advantageous setting value for the player, and the set value 3 is set to the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (the set value 1 is the most disadvantageous to the game field). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value 1 is the most disadvantageous to the player. The set value may be set, and the set value 3 may be set as the most advantageous set value for the player.

In particular, in the feature unit 122SG, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), "00H" is set in the address F000, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is a state in which the set value 1 is automatically set, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the most advantageous state for the player. Therefore, some players cause the CPU 103 to execute the RAM clear process (see FIG. 9-13 (A)) after causing an abnormality in the RAM 102, thereby causing the pachinko gaming machine 1 to illegally set the set value 1. It is expected to be set. Therefore, as described above, by setting the set value 1 as the most disadvantageous setting value for the player, the pachinko gaming machine 1 plays a game based on the fact that the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 or the like. It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine from becoming advantageous to the person, and it is possible to improve the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the above-described embodiment, the lighting period of the gaming effect lamp 9, the sound and output period output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image are the special control and the specific control executed by the effect control CPU 120. The present invention exemplifies a mode in which whether or not an image is displayed on the display device 5 is different (controls related to notification at startup are different), but the present invention is not limited to this, and these special controls and specific controls are used. In addition to the control related to the notification at the time of activation described above, the initial symbol (see FIGS. 9-19), the background image, and the character displayed on the image display device 5 after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where the game can be played. Whether or not to perform control related to the production such as different things (the production mode and the production state after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where the game can be played) and the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 are executed. It may include control related to the confirmation operation such that the mode of the confirmation operation and the execution period are different. That is, the special control and the specific control in the present invention may be controls in which at least a part of the target controlled by the effect control CPU 120, the control mode of the effect control CPU 120, the control period of the effect control CPU 120, and the like are different. ..

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine. For example, a game can be played by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value. Is possible to start, and one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to an image display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and the variable display derived to the image display device is completed. It can also be applied to slot machines where prizes can be generated according to the result.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the embodiment, a message such as "setting is being changed" is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the determination that the effect control CPU 120 has received the setting value change start notification command. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the setting change has been executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these notifications are notified by the main board 11 (CPU103). In this case, a signal that can identify that the main board 11 is changing the setting to a management device such as an external hall management computer, for example, information. The output from the terminal board may be used to notify an external device, and the main board 11 (CPU103) may display or light a display, a lamp, or the like connected to the main board 11. By controlling the state, it may be recognizable from the outside that the setting is being changed. For example, all the indicators, lamps, and the like connected to the main board 11 may be turned on. In order to distinguish between the state where the setting is being changed and the state other than that (the state in which the game is possible), it is preferable to make the display, the lamp, etc. connected to the main board 11 emit light in a mode different from that during the normal game. ..

Further, not only when these settings are being changed, but also when the settings are being confirmed, the main board 11 (CPU 103) outputs a signal to the outside to notify the user, or is connected to the main board 11. By controlling the display and lighting state of the display, lamp, etc., it may be possible to notify from the outside that the setting is being confirmed so that it can be recognized.

In this way, by executing the notification by the main board 11 (CPU 103), for example, even for a model that does not have the image display device 5, for example, a model such as a drum machine, the setting is being changed and the setting is confirmed. You can recognize that it is inside.

When the main board 11 (CPU 103) executes notification, a dedicated lamp, LED, or the like may be provided to notify that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. The first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display connected to the main board 11 (CPU103) for the purpose of preventing the cost increase due to the provision of these dedicated lamps, LEDs, and the like. The display mode of the device 20 is a special display mode that is not displayed during a normal game (variable display, non-variable display (standby), big hit game, etc.), for example, a blinking display or a special display pattern (special special feature). It may be notified by lighting and displaying in (Fig.).

Further, in the case of providing a dedicated lamp, LED, etc., in order to prevent the player or the like from easily recognizing that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, for example, these lamps or the like. An LED or the like may be provided inside the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, or the ordinary symbol display device 20.

In addition, in the case of notifying both that the setting is being changed and that the setting is being confirmed, these states are notified (notified to the outside) in the notification mode (same output signal) of 1. Alternatively, by notifying (notifying the outside) each of these states in an individual notification mode (different output signal), it may be possible to identify which state of each state is from the outside.

Further, when it is possible to notify that the main board 11 (CPU 103) is changing the setting or confirming the setting by lighting / blinking a dedicated lamp, LED, or the like, the display control unit on the effect control board 12 Without waiting for the rise of 123 (without waiting for the display of a message such as "setting is being changed" on the image display device 5 to start), the setting is being changed immediately by lighting / blinking the dedicated lamp or LED. It is possible to notify that there is something or that the setting is being confirmed.

(Explanation of Feature Unit 138SG of the Present Embodiment)
Next, the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment will be described. The front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 138SG of the present embodiment is omitted because it is the same as the feature section 31AK described above.

In the feature unit 128SG, the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs and the like are included.

FIG. 10-1 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 138SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-3 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-1 (A), the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game using the first special diagram in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the variation start in the special symbol game using the second special diagram in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variablely displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data are set according to the fluctuation pattern to be designated and the like.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), the determination result (pre-determination result) of whether the variation display result is "miss", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variation display result designation command indicating a preliminary determination result that the variation display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "non-probable variable big hit". The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a big winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the large winning opening that notifies that the period during which the large winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data are set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to identifiablely display the special figure reserved storage number on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to identifiablely display the special figure reserved storage number on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

FIG. 10-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 10-2, in the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern determination are used. Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 and the random number value MR4 for determining the display result of the normal map are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 is one of the random numbers MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown). Numerical data indicating the unit may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game to the big hit game state or the small hit game state as "big hit" or "small hit". It is a random value used for the purpose, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type to be one of "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", and "non-probability variation" when the variation display result is "big hit". It is a random value, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to ". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "missing normal figure". It is a random value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 10-3 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature portion 138SG of the present embodiment. In the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is "missing", the variation display mode of the decorative pattern corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", respectively. In addition, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the fluctuation display result is a "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern") and varies. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "big hit" is called a jackpot fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "small hit" is called a small hit (special hit) fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment provides only one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided as described above. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment, the super reach fluctuation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are shown. Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed in the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment, the super reach effect of the super reach β is executed. The fluctuation pattern is set to have a longer special figure fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, so that the big hit expectation is high. In the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are referred to as, for example, a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after determining first, only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided to determine these variations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared in advance for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals to be various control commands from the main board 11, and a plurality of fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. 10-3. The table data and the like that make up the variation pattern table to be stored are stored.

FIG. 10-4 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the present embodiment, the display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure is not limited to this. It is also possible to use individual display result determination tables for the second special figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table is determined to be a variable display result in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" in the big hit game state and whether or not the variable display result is controlled as a "small hit" in the small hit game state. , Is a table referred to for determination based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

In the display result determination table of this embodiment, the special figure display result is determined according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value value MR1 for determination is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit", "small hit", and "missing".

In the display result judgment table, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment is a variable display as to whether or not the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state. It is the determination data assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the small hit gaming state with the result as a "small hit". In the display result determination table of this embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are "big hit" than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result. As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability determined (about 1/300 in this embodiment) (about 1/30 in this embodiment). ). That is, in the display result determination table, there is a probability that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so as to be high.

In the display result determination table, the same number of determination values are assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" regardless of whether or not the game state is a probable change state. As a result, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state as a "small hit" regardless of whether or not it is in the probabilistic state (feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment). Then 1/200) is constant.

FIG. 10-5 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table of this embodiment has one of a plurality of jackpot types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". The table referenced to determine. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variation is displayed (variable) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol). The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot B" depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the symbol display device 4B. It is assigned to multiple types of jackpots such as ".

Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 10-5 (B). In this embodiment, high accuracy control and time saving control are executed as the jackpot type after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The probabilistic jackpot A and the probabilistic jackpot B that shift to the high probability high base state, and the non-probability jackpot that shifts to the low probability high base state by executing only the time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state are set.

In the big hit game state by "probability change big hit A" and the big hit game state by "non-probability change big hit", as described above, 16 rounds (so-called) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are performed. 16 rounds), a big hit that is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, in the big hit game state by the "probability change big hit B", as described above, the round for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). It's a big hit. Therefore, the "probability change jackpot A" may be referred to as a 16-round (16R) probability variation jackpot, and the "probability variation jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probability variation jackpot.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A and the probabilistic jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before it is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), "probability variation jackpot A" and "probability variation jackpot B" depending on whether the fluctuation special map is the first special map or the second special map. The allocation of judgment values for the jackpot type is different. That is, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the determination value in a predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is assigned to the big hit type of "probability variable big hit B" with a small number of rounds. On the other hand, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the determination value is not assigned to the big hit type of "probability variable big hit B". With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. In the case of Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variable jackpot B" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined to control the jackpot type to the short-term open jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to "probability variable jackpot B". In the game state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the short-term open jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small and the game interest is reduced. It can be prevented.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is determined by whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. Since they are the same regardless of whether they are present or not, the probability of becoming a non-probable big hit and the probability of becoming a probable big hit are the same regardless of whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot B" differs depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, and the "probability change jackpot A" is used. The assignment of the judgment value to "" also differs depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, and for "probability variable jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, the variable special figure is the second special figure. It is set so that the case of is easier to determine than the case of the first special figure.

Even when the variable special map is the second special map, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from the case where the variable special map is the first special map is assigned to the big hit type of "probability variable big hit B". You may. For example, when the variable special map is the second special map, a smaller determination value than when the variable special map is the first special map may be assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B". Alternatively, regardless of whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data.

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is determined in advance that the special figure display result is "big hit", and the special figure display result is "small hit". The fluctuation pattern judgment table for small hits used when it is pre-determined to be, and the fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss used when it is pre-determined to make the special figure display result "miss". , Are prepared in advance.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take. In this embodiment, when the type of the jackpot is "probability variation jackpot A" or "probability variation jackpot B", the super reach β is easily determined, and the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot". In the case of, the super reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, it does not become “probability change jackpot A” or “probability variation jackpot B”. It is possible to raise the player's expectation.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, all random numbers within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be determined for the variation pattern (PC1-1) of the special hit (small hit). Assigned as a value.

Further, the loss pattern determination table is used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less, and the loss pattern determination table A is used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4. The variation pattern determination table B for loss, the variation pattern determination table C for loss used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8, and the high base state in which the time saving control is implemented. The fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss used in the above is prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the super reach. A predetermined random value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of β loss. Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach corresponding to a total reserved storage number of 2 to 4 are obtained. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing. Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach corresponding to a total reserved storage number of 5 to 8 are obtained. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing. Further, in the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss corresponding to the time reduction control (PA1-4). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern (PA2-3) of PA2-2) and super reach β loss.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, the variation time of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and further, the variation pattern (PA1). The fluctuation time of the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter than that of -2). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. Occasionally, by winning a start, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening ( By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed because the variable display time becomes long.

Further, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with, for example, an effect control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

In the effect control flag setting unit, there are a plurality of types that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

It should be noted that the effect control buffer setting unit stores data constituting the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. The command buffer received at the time of starting winning corresponds to the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display is provided. Further, in the start winning command buffer, the storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage is stored. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start winning to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, the variable category designation Four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the receive command buffer at the time of start winning are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the hold. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed as variable. It is set to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process executed when the process is finished.

FIG. 10-6 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (138SGS351). When the first variable start command reception flag is set (138SGS351; Y), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 138SG194A. The various command data and various flags that are attached and stored are shifted upward by one buffer number (138SGS352). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (138SGS351; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (138SGS353). If the second variation start command reception flag is not set (138SGS353; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variation start command reception flag is set (138SGS353; Y), the start is started. Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the command buffer 138SG194A received at the time of winning are higher by one buffer number. Shift to (138SGS354). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

After the execution of the 138SGS352 or the 138SGS354, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (138SGS355).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (138SGS356). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the stopped symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment, when the received variation display result designation command is the second variation display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, 3 as a stop symbol. Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols) with the symbols aligned with "7". Further, when the received variation display result specification command is the third variation display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from the combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variation display result specification command is the fourth variation display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variation display result specification command is the fifth variation display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the combination of the three symbols as stop symbols based on a specific rule different from the loss or the big hit (for example). It is determined to be a continuous odd or even combination such as "135" or "246"). Further, when the received variation display result designation command is the first variation display result designation command corresponding to the loss, a combination of decorative symbols (loss symbols) in which the three symbols are not uniform is determined as the stop symbol.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the countdown effect and the freeze effect are executed in the variation display based on the variation display result and the variation pattern (138SGS358). The countdown effect in the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment is that the image 138SG005a (see FIG. 10-11) of the counter is displayed on the image display device 5 after the variable display is started, and the countdown is performed in the image 138SG005a of the counter. Is an effect of notifying whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed based on the result of the countdown (whether or not the countdown is completed). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (A), the freeze effect in the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment is to temporarily stop the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol for 3 seconds from the fluctuation start timing. It is a production that suggests that the variable display result will be a big hit.

In the upper right part of the image display device 5 in the feature portion 138SG of the present embodiment, a small symbol 138SG005s whose vertical width and horizontal width are shorter than the decorative symbol is arranged, and the small symbol 138SG005s is arranged. The variable display is possible in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In the processing of 138SGS358, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when the fluctuation display result is a big hit and the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the non-execution of the countdown effect and the freeze effect is determined at a rate of 95%. , Execution of the countdown effect in the failure pattern is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the countdown effect in the success pattern is determined at a rate of 0%, execution of the freeze effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the countdown effect is determined. The execution of the success pattern and the execution of the freeze effect are determined at a rate of 0%.

As shown in FIG. 10-8 (A), the failure pattern of the countdown effect is that 10 seconds, which is the initial value of the timer, is displayed in the counter image 138SG005a from the fluctuation start timing, and the value is subtracted and updated (countdown). ) Is executed, and the countdown ends without being completed (9 seconds after the start of the countdown, the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a changes to the failure mode (see FIG. 10-12 (I)), and the counter image 138SG005a is displayed. The value displayed in is not 0 and ends), and the success pattern of the countdown effect is the initial value of the timer from the fluctuation start timing as shown in FIG. 10-8 (B). 10 seconds is displayed in the counter image 138SG005a, the value is subtracted and updated (countdown), and the countdown is completed (the value displayed in the counter image 138SG005a becomes 0 and the counter image is displayed. This is an effect pattern in which the display mode of 138SG005a changes to a successful mode (see FIG. 10-12 (H)).

In the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment, the place where the execution of both the countdown effect (success pattern) and the freeze effect is determined is the variable start timing as the freeze effect as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B). The variable display of the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped for 3 seconds from the beginning. Then, a value (7 seconds) obtained by subtracting 3 seconds from the timer initial value of 10 seconds as a countdown effect from the end timing of the freeze effect (timing of 3 seconds from the start of fluctuation) is displayed in the counter image 138SG005a. At the same time, the subtraction update (countdown) of the value is executed, and the countdown is completed (the value displayed in the counter image 138SG005a becomes 0, and the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a is a successful mode (FIG. 10-12). (See (H)).

In the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment, when it is decided to execute the countdown effect and the freeze effect, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B), the countdown effect is started from the end timing of the freeze effect. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing for starting the countdown effect when the execution of the countdown effect and the freeze effect is determined is the timing immediately before or immediately after the end timing of the freeze effect (for example). , The timing 1 second before the end of the freeze effect and the timing 1 second after the end).

Further, in the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment, when it is decided to execute the countdown effect and the freeze effect, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B), the countdown effect is started from the end timing of the freeze effect. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the freeze effect and the countdown effect, an effect that can be executed from the fluctuation start timing (for example, an effect of operating the movable body 32, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B). If there is an effect that vibrates the operation unit such as, or if the pachinko game machine is equipped with a light guide plate, an effect that causes the light guide plate to emit light, etc.), these effects are duplicated together with the countdown effect from the end timing of the freeze effect. And execute it. In addition, when it is possible to execute a plurality of effects from the fluctuation start timing in this way, the ratio controlled to the big hit game state may be different depending on the hypercomplex number of these effects.

If the fluctuation display result is a big hit and the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the non-execution of the countdown effect and the freeze effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the countdown effect with the failure pattern is performed at a rate of 0%. Decide, execute the countdown effect in the success pattern at a rate of 25%, determine the execution of the freeze effect at a rate of 50%, execute the countdown effect in the success pattern and execute the freeze effect at a rate of 15%. Determined by the ratio of.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), when the fluctuation display result is lost and the fluctuation pattern is non-reach, the non-execution of the countdown effect and the freeze effect is determined at a rate of 100%, and the countdown effect is performed. The execution of the failure pattern is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of the countdown effect is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of the freeze effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the success pattern of the countdown effect is determined. The execution of the freeze effect and the execution of the freeze effect are determined at a rate of 0%. If the fluctuation display result is lost and the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the non-execution of the countdown effect and the freeze effect is determined at a rate of 75%, and the execution of the countdown effect failure pattern is determined at a rate of 25%. However, the execution of the countdown effect in the success pattern is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of the freeze effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the countdown effect in the success pattern and the execution of the freeze effect are 0%. Determined by percentage. If the fluctuation display result is lost and the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the non-execution of the countdown effect and the freeze effect is determined at a rate of 35%, and the execution of the countdown effect failure pattern is performed at a rate of 0%. It is decided, the execution in the success pattern of the countdown effect is decided at the rate of 40%, the execution of the freeze effect is decided at the rate of 20%, and the execution in the success pattern of the countdown effect and the execution of the freeze effect are 5%. Determined by the ratio of.

Then, when the fluctuation display result is a small hit and the fluctuation pattern is a special hit (small hit), the non-execution of the countdown effect and the freeze effect is determined at a rate of 100%, and the execution in the failure pattern of the countdown effect is executed. Determined at a rate of 0%, execution in the success pattern of the countdown effect is determined at a rate of 0%, execution of the freeze effect is determined at a rate of 0%, execution in the success pattern of the countdown effect and freeze effect Execution is determined at a rate of 0%.

That is, when the countdown effect is executed in the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment, if the fluctuation pattern is non-reach, normal reach, or special hit (small hit), the countdown effect is always executed in the failure pattern, and the fluctuation pattern is changed. If it is Super Reach, the countdown effect is always executed in the success pattern. Further, when the execution of both the freeze effect and the countdown effect is decided, the countdown effect is always executed in the success pattern, while the freeze effect is not executed and the countdown effect is determined to be executed. There are cases where the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern and cases where it is executed in the failure pattern. That is, when the freeze effect is executed and the countdown effect is executed, the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern at a higher rate than when the countdown effect is executed without executing the freeze effect. .. It should be noted that the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the countdown effect is always executed in a success pattern when both the freeze effect and the countdown effect are determined to be executed. Is not limited to this, and even when it is decided to execute both the freeze effect and the countdown effect, the countdown effect may be executed in the failure pattern.

In addition, regarding these countdown effects and freeze effects, the rate at which the variable display result becomes the big hit (big hit expectation) is set high when the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern and the freeze effect is executed. , When the freeze effect is executed, when the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern, and when the countdown effect is executed in the failure pattern, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit is set to decrease (variable display). The rate at which the result is a big hit; countdown effect (success pattern) + freeze effect> freeze effect> countdown effect (success pattern)> countdown effect (failure pattern)).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the countdown effect is determined in the process of the 138 SGS 358 (138 SGS 359). When it is decided not to execute the countdown effect in the processing of 138SGS358 (138SGS359; N), the process proceeds to 138SGS361, and when it is decided to execute the countdown effect in the processing of 138SGS358 (138SGS359; Y), the variation pattern and the variation display result are displayed. Based on this, the effect mode of the countdown effect (the number and color of the image 138SG005a of the counter displayed on the image display device 5) is determined (138SGS360).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (C), when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, if the fluctuation display result is a big hit, one display of the image 138SG005a of the blue counter is 10%. The display of one image of the red counter image 138SG005a is determined at a rate of 20%, and the two displays of the image 138SG005a of the blue counter are determined at a rate of 30%. The two displays of the image 138SG005a are determined at a rate of 40%. If the variable display result is lost, the display of one image 138SG005a of the blue counter is determined at a rate of 10%, and the display of one image 138SG005a of the red counter is determined at a rate of 40%. , The two displays of the blue counter image 138SG005a are determined at a rate of 30%, and the two displays of the red counter image 138SG005a are determined at a rate of 20%.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, if the fluctuation display result is a big hit, one display of the blue counter image 138SG005a is determined at a rate of 80%, and one of the red counter images 138SG005a. Is determined at a rate of 15%, the two displays of the blue counter image 138SG005a are determined at a rate of 5%, and the two displays of the red counter image 138SG005a are determined at a rate of 0%. .. If the variable display result is lost, one display of the blue counter image 138SG005a is determined at a rate of 95%, and one display of the red counter image 138SG005a is determined at a rate of 5%. , The two displays of the blue counter image 138SG005a are determined at a rate of 0%, and the two displays of the red counter image 138SG005a are determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, when the red counter image 138SG005a is displayed as a countdown effect, the variable display result is set to be a big hit at a higher rate than when the blue counter image 138SG005a is displayed. At the same time, when two counter images 138SG005a are displayed as a countdown effect, the variable display result is set to be a big hit at a higher rate than when one counter image 138SG005a is displayed. More accurately, in the countdown effect, when two images 138SG005a of the red counter are displayed, the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit is the highest, and thereafter, two images 138SG005a of the blue counter are displayed. In that case, when one image 138SG005a of the red counter is displayed and one image 138SG005a of the blue counter is displayed, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit is set to be low. (Ratio where the fluctuation display result becomes a big hit; 2 red counter images 138SG005a are displayed> 2 blue counter images 138SG005a are displayed> 1 red counter image 138SG005a is displayed> Blue counter image 138SG005a is displayed Display one).

Further, as described above, the case where the countdown effect is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach is the case where the countdown effect is executed in the failure pattern, and the case where the countdown effect is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach. Is the case where the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern. Therefore, when one image 138SG005a of the blue counter is displayed, one image 138SG005a of the red counter is displayed or the image of the counter. When the countdown effect is executed in the failure pattern at a higher rate than when two 138SG005a are displayed, that is, when the red counter image 138SG005a is displayed or when two counter images 138SG005a are displayed. , The countdown effect is set to be executed in the success pattern at a higher rate than when one image 138SG005a of the blue counter is displayed.

More specifically, when two images 138SG005a of the red counter are displayed, the ratio of the countdown effect being executed in the success pattern is the highest, and thereafter, when two images 138SG005a of the blue counter are displayed. , When one image 138SG005a of the red counter is displayed, the rate at which the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern is set to be lower in the order of the case where one image 138SG005a of the blue counter is displayed. ..

In the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (C) and 10-7 (D), when two images 138SG005a of the red counter are displayed, a countdown effect is always produced. Is set to be executed in the success pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the countdown effect is executed in the failure pattern even when two images 138SG005a of the red counter are displayed. It may be provided that the case is to be provided.

Further, in the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment, when the image 138SG005a of the red counter is displayed, the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern at a higher rate than when the image 138SG005a of the blue counter is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the image 138SG005a of the blue counter is displayed, the rate is higher than the case where the image 138SG005a of the red counter is displayed. The countdown effect may be executed in a success pattern.

Further, in the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment, when the image 138SG005a of the red counter is displayed, the variation display result becomes a big hit at a higher rate than the case where the image 138SG005a of the blue counter is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the image 138SG005a of the blue counter is displayed, the variable display result is displayed at a higher rate than when the image 138SG005a of the red counter is displayed. May be a big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment, an example is exemplified in which the ratio of the countdown effect being executed in the success pattern differs depending on whether the color of the displayed counter image 138SG005a is red or blue. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image 138SG005a of the counter can be displayed in three or more colors, and the countdown effect is produced according to which of the images 138SG005a of the counter of three or more colors is displayed. May be executed at different rates in the success pattern.

Further, in the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment, when two counter images 138SG005a are displayed, the countdown effect is executed in a success pattern at a higher rate than when one counter image 138SG005a is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when one image 138SG005a of the counter is displayed, the rate is higher than when two images 138SG005a of the counter are displayed. The countdown effect may be executed in a success pattern.

Further, in the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment, when two counter images 138SG005a are displayed, the variation display result becomes a big hit at a higher rate than when one counter image 138SG005a is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when one counter image 138SG005a is displayed, the variable display result is higher than when two counter images 138SG005a are displayed. May be a big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment, an example is exemplified in which the ratio of the countdown effect being executed in the success pattern differs depending on whether the displayed counter image 138SG005a is one or two. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more images 138SG005a of the counter can be displayed, and the rate at which the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern differs depending on the number of images 138SG005a of these counters displayed. You may do so.

Further, in the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment, the rate at which the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern and the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit are different according to the color and the number of displayed images of the counter image 138SG005a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rate at which the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern according to the color and the number of displayed images of the counter image 138SG005a and the variable display result are big hits. Only one of the proportions may be different.

Further, in the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment, the rate at which the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern and the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit are different according to the color of the image 138SG005a of the counter and the number of displayed images. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to or in place of the color and the number of displayed images of the counter image 138SG005a, depending on the shape and size of the counter image 138SG005a. The rate at which the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern and the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit may be different.

After the processing of the 138SGS360 is executed, or when the execution of the countdown effect is not determined (138SGS359; N), the effect control pattern according to the fluctuation pattern, the presence / absence of the freeze effect or the countdown effect, and the effect mode of the countdown effect. Select (Process Table) (138SGS361). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (138SGS362).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Further, the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the variable display, the freeze effect, and the countdown effect are executed based on one process table, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , These variable displays, freeze effects, and countdown effects may be executed individually based on different process tables.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (138SGS363). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the variation display of the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one is performed, but the effect control CPU 120 May select a variation pattern to be used from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern specification command.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the fluctuation time timer (138SGS364). Further, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (138SG365). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. The variation of the decorative pattern is realized by outputting the signal corresponding to the image data to the image display device 5 and displaying the image corresponding to the signal by the image display device 5. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (138SGS366).

FIG. 10-10 is a flowchart showing the variable display during effect processing (S172) in the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 sets the respective values of the process timer, the variation time timer, and the variation control timer by -1 (138SGS401, 138SGS402, 138SGS403). Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process timer has timed out (138SGS404). When the process timer is out of timer (138SGS404; Y), the process data is switched (138SGS405). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table to the process timer (138SGS406). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc., which are set next, and the process proceeds to 138SGS409 ( 138SGS407). On the other hand, when the process timer is not timer-out (138SGS404; N), according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). The control of the effect device (effect component) is executed, and the process proceeds to 138 SGS 409 (138 SGS 408).

In the 138SGS409, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the freeze effect is being executed (138SGS409). When the freeze effect is being executed (138SGS409; Y), only the variation display of the small symbol 138SG005s is executed among the decorative symbols and the small symbols 138SG005s, and the process proceeds to 138SGS412 (138SGS410), and the freeze effect is not being executed. In the case (138SGS409; N), the variation display of the decorative symbol and the small symbol 138SG005s is executed, and the process proceeds to 138SGS412 (138SGS411).

Then, in the 138SGS412, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the execution start timing of the countdown effect (138SGS412). When it is the execution start timing of the countdown effect (138SGS412; Y), it is further determined whether or not the freeze effect has been executed (138SGS413). When the freeze effect is executed (138SGS413; Y), the countdown is started from the initial value of 10 seconds minus 3 seconds (7 seconds) and proceeds to 138SGS416 (138SGS414), the freeze effect is executed. If not (138SGS413; N), the countdown is started from the initial value of 10 seconds and proceeds to 138SGS416 (138SGS415).

If it is determined in 138SGS412 that it is not the execution start timing of the countdown effect (138SGS412; N), the process proceeds to 138SGS416 without executing the processes of 138SGS413 to 138SGS415.

In the 138SGS416, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the countdown effect (138SGS3416). When it is the end timing of the countdown effect (138SGS416; Y), it is determined whether or not the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern (138SGS417). When the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern (138SGS417; Y), the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a is notified of the execution of the super reach reach effect shown in the success mode (FIG. 10-12 (H)). When the display mode is changed to 138SGS420 and the countdown effect is executed in the failure pattern (138SGS417; N), the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a is changed to the failure mode (FIG. 10-12 (I)). The display mode for notifying that the reach effect of the super reach shown is not executed) is changed, and the process proceeds to 138SGS420.

In the 138SGS420, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation control timer is out of the timer (138SGS420). When the fluctuation control timer is out of the timer (138SGS420; Y), the next display screen of the decorative symbol or small symbol 138SG005s on the left, middle, and right (the screen that should be displayed 30 ms after the previous display switching of the effect symbol). Image data is created and written in a predetermined area of VRAM (138SGS421). In this way, the image display device 5 realizes fluctuation control of the decorative pattern. The display control unit 123 transmits a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. Output. In this way, the image display device 5 displays a background image, a character image, a decorative symbol, a small symbol 138SG005s, etc. in the variation of the decorative symbol. Further, the predetermined value is reset in the fluctuation control timer, and the process proceeds to 138SGS423 (138SGS422).

If the fluctuation control timer is not out of the timer in 138SGS420 (138SGS420; N), the process proceeds to 138SGS423 without executing the processes of 138SGS421 and 138SGS422.

In the 138SGS423, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (138SGS423). When the variable time timer is out of the timer (138SGS423; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (S173), and the variable display effect process is terminated (138SGS425). ). Further, when the variable time timer is not timer-out (138SGS423; N), it is further determined whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set (138SGS424). When the confirmation command reception flag is not set (138SGS424; N), the variable display effect processing is terminated, and when the confirmation command reception flag is set (138SGS424; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is specified. The value corresponding to the figure-hit waiting process (S173) is set, and the variable display during effect process is terminated (138 SGS425). For this reason, even if the fluctuation time timer is not out of the timer, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received. Therefore, for example, a fluctuation pattern showing a long fluctuation time due to noise between the boards or the like. Even when a specified command is received, the variation of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variation time elapses (at the end of the variation of the special symbol).

In the process table used for controlling the variation of the decorative symbol, the process data during the variation display of the decorative symbol is set. That is, the sum of the process timer setting values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n in the process of 138SGS404 times out, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and the effect control of the decorative symbol based on the process table ends. do.

The display of the counter image 138SG005a after the end of the countdown effect may be terminated at the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach, the end timing of the variable display, or the like.

Next, the modes of the countdown effect and the freeze effect in the feature unit 138SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-11 to 10-13.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), when it is decided not to execute the freeze effect of the execution of the countdown effect at the start timing of the new variation display, FIGS. 10-11 (B) to 10- As shown in 11 (E), the image 138SG005a of the counter is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5, and the countdown is started in the image 138SG005a of the counter as the fluctuation starts. At this time, the counter image 138SG005a may be displayed in red or blue, and may be displayed as one or two, and the counter image 138SG005a may be displayed. Depending on the color and the number, the rate at which the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern and the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit are different.

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (F), the countdown is executed together with the fluctuation display, and the value displayed in the counter image 138SG005a becomes 1 second (countdown is executed for 9 seconds). If the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern, the value displayed in the image 138SG005a of the counter is as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (G) and 10-12 (H). After the time reaches 0 seconds (the countdown is completed), the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter changes to a success mode (a display mode for notifying the execution of the reach effect of the super reach). On the other hand, if the countdown effect is executed in the failure pattern, the value displayed in the counter image 138SG005a becomes 0 seconds (the countdown is completed) as shown in FIG. 10-12 (I). The display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter changes to the failure mode (display mode for notifying the non-execution of the reach effect of the super reach).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-13 (J), when the execution of the freeze effect and the execution of the countdown effect are determined at the start timing of the new variation display, FIGS. 10-13 (K) and 10-13. As shown in (L), the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped within 3 seconds from the timing of the fluctuation start during the execution period of the freeze effect.

As a freeze effect, while the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped, the variation display of the small symbol 138SG005s and the variation display of the special symbol are executed without stopping, so that the player can use these small symbols 138SG005s and the special symbol. By visually recognizing the variable display of the symbol, it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed even while the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped.

Then, when the freeze effect for 3 seconds is completed, the variable display of the decorative pattern is restarted and the countdown effect is started. As the countdown effect at this time, the countdown is started from a value (7 seconds) obtained by subtracting 3 seconds, which is the execution period of the freeze effect, from the original initial value of 10 seconds in the image 138SG005a of the counter.

Although not shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-13, when the execution of the freeze effect and the non-execution of the countdown effect are determined as shown in the processes of 138SGS409 to 138SGS411 in FIG. 10-10. Also, within 3 seconds from the timing of the start of fluctuation during the execution period of the freeze effect, the variation display of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, while the variation display of the small symbol 138SG005s and the special symbol is executed without stopping.

Although embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation display, the image 138SG005a of the counter is displayed on the image display device 5 for the variation display so that the countdown effect can be executed. Is not limited to this, and as a modification 138SG-1, as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (A) to 10-14 (D), the image display device 5 targets a variable display that has not yet been executed. The image 138SG005a of the counter may be displayed in advance to give notice of the execution of the countdown effect.

In this case, in the main board 11 and the effect control board 12, the hold data of the special figure game in which the start winning has occurred but has not been started is stored as the hold storage, and when the hold storage occurs, the hold memory is stored. The configuration is provided with a determination means capable of determining whether or not the fluctuation display result is a big hit. Then, the effect control CPU 120 may be able to determine whether or not the generated hold memory is the target of the countdown effect based on the determination result by the determination means.

Further, in such a case, the countdown effect is executed by displaying the image 138SG005a of the counter on the image display device 5 for the fluctuation display from the timing of starting the fluctuation display of the target, and by the determination of the determination means. Even if the rate at which the countdown effect is executed differs depending on the case where the counter image 138SG005a is displayed on the image display device 5 from the timing before the start of the variable display to announce the execution of the countdown effect. good. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to the timing at which the image 138SG005a of the counter is displayed on the image display device 5, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In particular, when the counter image 138SG005a is displayed on the image display device 5 from the timing before the start of the variation display of the target to announce the execution of the countdown effect, the image is targeted for the variation display from the timing of starting the variation display. The counter image 138SG005a is displayed on the image display device 5 by displaying the counter image 138SG005a on the display device 5 so that the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern at a higher rate than when the countdown effect is executed. It is possible to draw more attention to the player with respect to the timing to be performed.

Further, in the modified example 138SG-1, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B), the image 138SG005a of the counter is displayed on the image display device 5 from the timing before the start of the fluctuation display to announce the execution of the countdown effect. In this case, it can be easily understood that the execution of the countdown effect is announced by displaying "preparing" or the like in the image 138SG005a of the counter.

Further, in the feature unit 138SG of the above-described embodiment, when the non-execution of the freeze effect is determined, the embodiment in which the countdown effect is executed from the start timing of the variable display is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Even if it is decided to execute the count cutoff effect, it is not necessary to execute the count cutoff effect from the start timing of the variable display. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-15 (A) to 10-15 (C) as the modified example 138SG-2, when the execution of the countdown effect is determined as the target of the variation display at the start of the variation display. First, a display mode (for example, a counter) suggesting that a countdown effect is executed at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 (for example, the upper left portion of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 10-15 (B)). The image 138SG005a of the counter is displayed in the display mode) in which "preparing" or the like is displayed in the image 138SG005a, and the process waits until the start timing of the countdown effect. Then, the countdown is started in the counter image 138SG005a from the start timing of the countdown effect.

As described above, a plurality of waiting periods from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the countdown effect can be determined, and the gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state according to the length of the waiting period. The ratio and the ratio at which the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern are different (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (C), when the waiting period from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the countdown effect is long, , The countdown effect is executed in the success pattern at a higher rate than when the waiting period from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the countdown effect is short). By doing so, the player can pay attention to whether or not the image 138SG005a of the counter is displayed on the image display device 5 in a display mode suggesting the execution of the countdown effect at the timing when the start winning is generated. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the feature unit 138SG of the above-described embodiment, when the non-execution of the freeze effect and the execution of the countdown effect are determined, a mode in which the countdown is executed for 10 seconds as the countdown effect is exemplified. Is not limited to this, and when it is decided not to execute the freeze effect and to execute the countdown effect, the countdown execution period is selected from a plurality of periods (for example, 5 seconds and 10 seconds) and executed. You may.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-16 (A) and 10-16 (B) as the modified example 139SG-1, when the execution in the success pattern of the countdown effect is determined, the variable display result. If is a big hit, the countdown execution period is determined to be 30% for 5 seconds, 70% for 10 seconds, and if the variable display result is lost, the countdown execution period is 80% for 5 seconds. Determined at a rate of 20% for 10 seconds. On the other hand, when the execution in the failure pattern of the countdown effect is decided, the execution period of the countdown is determined at a rate of 50% for 5 seconds and at a rate of 50% for 10 seconds regardless of the variable display result.

That is, in the present modification 139SG-1, when the countdown execution period is long (when the countdown execution period is determined to be 10 seconds), when the countdown execution period is short (the countdown execution period is determined to be 5 seconds). It is set so that the ratio controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit expectation) is higher than (when it is done).

Here, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach in the feature portion 138SG of the embodiment is always reach when 15 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 (A) and 10-17 (B), when the countdown execution period is determined to be 5 seconds, a wait of 10 seconds is obtained from the countdown end timing to the reach timing. When a period occurs and the countdown execution period is determined to be 10 seconds, a waiting period of 5 seconds occurs from the countdown end timing to the reach timing.

That is, in the present modification 139SG-1, when the waiting period from the end timing of the countdown to the timing of reaching is short by determining the execution period of the countdown (the waiting period is 10 seconds because the execution period of the countdown is 10 seconds). Is 5 seconds), the waiting period from the end timing of the countdown to the reach timing is longer (when the countdown execution period is 5 seconds and the waiting period is 10 seconds). The ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state (big hit expectation) is set high.

In the feature unit 138SG-1 of the present embodiment, the countdown execution period in the countdown effect is determined from a plurality of periods at different ratios according to the variable display result, from the end timing of the countdown to the timing of reaching. Although the form of determining the waiting period of the above is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the waiting period from the end timing of the countdown to the timing of reaching is varied from a plurality of periods according to the display result. By determining with, the execution period of the countdown in the countdown effect may be determined.

Further, in the feature unit 138SG-1 of the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the countdown period in the countdown effect is determined from 5 seconds and 10 seconds is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the countdown effect is not limited to this. The countdown period in may be determined from a period of 3 or more.

Further, in the feature unit 138SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the success pattern of the countdown effect is executed for the reach effect of the super reach is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the countdown is not limited to this. The effect may be executed for an effect other than the reach effect during the variable display (for example, a chance-up effect executed during the reach effect of the super reach). Further, when the success pattern of the countdown effect is executed for the effect executed during the reach effect of the super reach, after the execution of the countdown effect, the image of the counter image 138SG005a is once notified of the execution of the reach effect of the super reach. After changing to the display mode to be performed, the display mode may be further changed to notify the execution of the effect during the reach effect after the start of the reach effect of the super reach.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 (A) to 10-18 (E) as a modification 139SG-2, first, when the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern, the counter image 138SG005a is displayed. The display mode is changed to a display mode for notifying the execution of the reach effect of the super reach. As shown in FIGS. 10-18 (B) to 10-18 (D), the image 138SG005a of the counter changed to the display mode for notifying the execution of the reach effect of the super reach has the display mode of the reach effect. It is maintained until the start timing. Then, when the reach effect of the super reach is started, the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter changes to the display mode for notifying the execution of the chance up effect, and the chance up effect is executed during the reach effect.

Further, in the modified example 139-2, a form in which a plurality of effects to be targeted for a success pattern of the countdown effect is provided is exemplified, and a form in which the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter is changed to a display mode for notifying the execution of each effect. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a plurality of effects that are the targets of the success pattern of the countdown effect are provided as described above, as a modified example 139SG-3, FIGS. 10-19 (A) to As shown in FIG. 10-19 (E), the counter image 138SG005a after the execution of the success pattern of the countdown effect is temporarily concealed by the shutter image 138SG005b, the movable body 32, or the like, and the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a is displayed after the concealment is released. The player may be able to pay attention to whether or not the display mode has changed and whether or not the display mode has changed to correspond to which effect.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 (B) to 10-19 (E), the counter image 138SG005a is concealed by the shutter image 138SG005b, so that the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a has been counted down. The ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different depending on whether the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a is changed from the mode to the display mode for notifying the execution of the reach effect or the chance-up effect of the super reach. Therefore, the player pays more attention to whether or not the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a is changed by hiding the counter image 138SG005a by the shutter image 138SG005b, and whether the display mode is changed to correspond to which effect. Can be made to.

Further, the present modification 139SG-3 exemplifies a mode in which the execution period of the countdown effect and the execution period of the reach effect and the chance up effect of the super reach do not overlap, but the present invention is not limited to this. , At least a part of the execution period of the countdown effect and the execution period of the reach effect or the chance up effect of the super reach may overlap.

If the execution period of the countdown effect and the execution period of the reach effect or chance-up effect of the super reach partially overlap in this way, the reach effect or chance-up effect of the per reach is executed during the overlapping period. The counter image 138SG005a is temporarily concealed by the shutter image 138SG005b, and the suggestion effect suggesting that the counter image 138SG005a is controlled to another jackpot gaming state is executed during the concealment solution. It may be changed to the display mode to notify.

By doing so, even after the countdown ends and the reach effect or chance-up effect of the super reach is started, the counter image 138SG005a is concealed by the shutter image 138SG005b, and the concealment is being solved. Since the player can pay attention to whether or not the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a changes to the notification mode for notifying the execution of the other suggestion effect, the game entertainment can be improved.

In the present modification 139SG-3, the counter image 138SG005a after the successful pattern of the countdown effect is executed is concealed by the shutter image 138SG005b to make the counter image 138SG005a difficult to see, but the present invention is limited to this. The difficulty in visually recognizing the image 138SG005a of the counter is to reduce the size of the image 138SG005a of the counter, to move and display the image 138SG005a of the counter, and to hide only a part of the image 138SG005a of the counter. For example, if the form is difficult for the player to see, it does not have to be completely invisible to the player.

Further, in the feature unit 138SG of the above-described embodiment, when it is decided to execute the freeze effect, the embodiment in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped for 3 seconds from the start timing of the variation display is exemplified as the freeze period. The present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 140SG-1, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 (A) to 10-20 (D), the present invention is decorated from the start timing of the variable display as the freeze period. The period for stopping the variable display of the symbol may be determined from a plurality of periods (for example, 1 second and 3 seconds).

Further, in the case where the period for stopping the variable display of the decorative symbol can be determined from 1 second and 3 seconds from the start timing of the variable display as the freeze period, the game is played according to the length of the freeze period. The rate at which the state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state (big hit expectation) is different (in FIGS. 10-20, the case where the freeze period is long (3 seconds) is different from the case where the freeze period is short (1 second). The jackpot expectation is high).

In this way, if the period for stopping the variable display of the decorative symbol from the start timing of the variable display as the freeze period can be determined from a plurality of periods, both the execution of the freeze effect and the execution of the countdown effect are performed. If it is determined, the timer count effect may be started from the value obtained by subtracting the freeze period from the initial value (10 seconds) at the end timing of the freeze effect.

Further, in the feature unit 138SG of the above-described embodiment, when the execution of the countdown effect and the execution of the freeze effect are determined, the freeze effect is as shown in FIGS. 10-13 (J) to 10-13 (M). Although the embodiment in which the image 138SG005a of the counter is displayed on the image display device 5 from the end timing of the above and the countdown effect is executed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIG. 10-21 is shown as a modified example 140SG-2. As shown in FIGS. 10-21 (D), when the execution of the countdown effect and the execution of the freeze effect are determined, the freeze effect is executed from the start timing of the variable display and the image display device 5 is used. The counter image 138SG005a is displayed in a display mode suggesting that the countdown effect is executed (for example, a display mode in which "preparing" or the like is displayed in the counter image 138SG005a), and the counter is displayed from the end timing of the freeze effect. The display mode of the image 138SG005a may be changed to execute the countdown effect. By doing so, during the execution of the freeze effect, the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a does not change at the same time as the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped, so that the freeze effect and the countdown effect can be matched.

Further, in the feature unit 138SG of the above-described embodiment, a countdown effect and a freeze effect are exemplified as effects that can be executed from the start timing of the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display is not limited to this. As the effect that can be executed from the start timing, in addition to the freeze effect, an effect of operating the movable body 32, an effect of displaying a specific character on the image display device 5, and the like may be executed.

In the present modification 140SG-2, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 (B) to 10-21 (D), "Preparing" displays the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a during the execution of the freeze effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the freeze effect even during the execution of the freeze effect ( For example, 0.5 seconds after the start of the freeze effect), the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a may be changed from the state in which "preparing" is displayed to the state in which the initial value of the countdown is displayed.

Further, in the feature unit 138SG of the above-described embodiment, as a predetermined effect in the present invention, an embodiment in which a countdown effect for notifying the execution of the reach effect of the super reach can be executed by completing the countdown has been exemplified. Is not limited to this, and as a predetermined effect in the present invention, for example, a count-up from "0" to "100" is executed, and the count-up is completed (the count-up reaches "100"). Other than the countdown effect, such as a count-up effect that notifies the execution of the reach effect of the super reach by doing, a battle effect that notifies the execution of the reach effect of the super reach when the ally character fights against the enemy character and the ally character wins. It may be possible to carry out the production of. That is, the predetermined effect in the present invention is an effect that suggests a period until the reach effect of the super reach is started, such as the countdown effect shown in the feature unit 138SG of the embodiment, or the above-mentioned count-up effect. It also includes effects other than those that suggest the period until the reach effect of Super Reach is started by counting.

Further, in the feature unit 138SG of the above-described embodiment, when two counter images 138SG005a are displayed as a countdown effect, both of them exemplify a mode in which the reach effect of the super reach is targeted. When displaying two counter images 138SG005a as a countdown effect, the target effects may be different in the two counter images 138SG005a. In this way, when the target effects are different in the images 138SG005a of the two counters, the effect corresponding to the image 138SG005a of either counter is executed by providing the case where only one of the countdowns is completed. It may be possible to draw the player's attention to the crab.

Further, in the modification 139SG-1, the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a is maintained until the reach timing after the value displayed in the counter image 138SG005a reaches 0 seconds (countdown is completed). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the modified example 139SG-1, the value displayed in the image 138SG005a of the counter is 0 seconds (countdown is completed). In this case, the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter may be changed to a mode indicating that the counter is waiting until the reach timing (for example, a mode in which the "waiting" or "0 second" display is turned on). As a result, it becomes clearer that the mode indicates that the player is waiting, and the player can be more focused on the period from the waiting state to the change of the display mode, which improves the interest. can.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the title corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach is displayed from the start of the reach effect of the super reach (feature portion 31AK in FIGS. 8-1 to 8-12), and the main board 11 ( In the CPU 103), any one of a plurality of set values can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the set secret value obtained by converting the set set value is stored in the RAM 102, and the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). On the side, a form (feature part 122SG in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-27) that can execute a suggestion effect (morning one background effect) that suggests a set value, and a countdown effect or a freeze effect at the start of fluctuation. It is feasible, and the rate at which the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern differs depending on the effect mode of the countdown effect and whether or not the freeze effect is executed (feature unit 138SG in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-21). ) Have been disclosed, but a plurality of these feature parts may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the feature unit 122SG and the feature unit 138SG are applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the execution rate of the countdown effect, the execution rate of the freeze effect, the rate at which the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern (or the failure pattern), etc. May be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As described above, the feature portion 138SG of the above-described embodiment includes the inventions shown below. That is, as a conventional gaming machine, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-211762. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-211762, when the countdown effect (predetermined effect) is executed, the countdown is always completed (a specific mode), so that the countdown effect is in progress. There is a problem that the player cannot be noticed and the interest of the countdown production cannot be improved. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the invention 138SG that solves the problem.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Display means (for example, image display device 5) and
A suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach) suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state can be executed, and a predetermined display (for example, a counter image 138SG005a) is displayed on the display means to display the predetermined display. An effect execution means (for example, an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a countdown effect) in which the display mode is a specific mode (for example, the super reach notification mode shown in FIG. 10-18 (B)) in response to the execution of the suggestion effect. For example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10-10) and
Equipped with
The effect executing means performs a predetermined operation (for example, a countdown) using the predetermined display, and the success pattern in which the display mode becomes the specific mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (G)), an image of a counter. After the value displayed in 138SG005a reaches 0 seconds (countdown is completed), the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter changes to a success mode (a display mode for notifying the execution of the reach effect of the super reach). A failure pattern (for example, a value displayed in the image 138SG005a of the counter) in which the predetermined operation (for example, countdown) using the predetermined display is performed and the display mode does not become the specific mode is 0 seconds (pattern). The predetermined effect can be executed by a pattern in which the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter changes to a failure mode (a display mode for notifying the non-execution of the reach effect of the super reach) without completing the countdown).
There are a plurality of display modes of the predetermined display when the predetermined operation is performed (for example, a portion where the image 138SG005a of the counter is displayed in blue or red as shown in FIG. 10-11).
The rate at which the predetermined effect of the success pattern is executed differs depending on the display mode when the predetermined operation of the predetermined display is performed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (C) and 10-7 (D). The rate at which the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern differs depending on the color of the image 138SG005a of the counter displayed on the image display device 5).
A gaming machine characterized by this is equipped, and according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of a predetermined production.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the invention 138SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Display means (for example, image display device 5) and
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach) suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and specify a display mode of a predetermined display (for example, counter image 138SG005a) displayed on the display means. An effect execution means (for example, an effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a countdown effect) as an aspect (for example, a super reach notification mode shown in FIG. 10-18 (B)) corresponding to the execution of the suggestion effect. (Part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 10-10) and
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
A success pattern in which the display mode becomes the specific mode by a predetermined operation (for example, countdown) using the predetermined display (for example, a value displayed in the image 138SG005a of the counter as shown in FIG. 10-12 (G)). Is 0 seconds (the countdown is completed), the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter changes to a success mode (a display mode for notifying the execution of the reach effect of the super reach), and the display mode is described above. A failure pattern that does not become a specific mode (for example, the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a does not become 0 seconds (countdown is completed) without the value displayed in the counter image 138SG005a becoming 0 seconds (countdown is completed), and the display mode is the failure mode (super reach reach effect). The predetermined effect can be executed by the pattern) that changes to the display mode) for notifying the non-execution.
A plurality of the predetermined displays can be displayed in the predetermined effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-11, a portion where one or two images 138SG005a of the counter are displayed).
The rate at which the predetermined effect of the success pattern is executed differs depending on the number of displays of the predetermined display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (C) and 10-7 (D), the countdown effect becomes the success pattern. The ratio to be executed differs depending on the number of images 138SG005a of the counter displayed on the image display device 5).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the interest of a predetermined production can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the invention 138SG,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on any one of the predetermined display mode, the display number of the predetermined display, or a combination thereof (for example, FIGS. 10-7 (C) and 10-7 (D)). As shown in the above, the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the color and number of the image 138SG005a of the counter displayed on the image display device 5).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, attention to a predetermined display can be further increased, and the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state by a predetermined effect can be grasped. , You can improve the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the invention 138SG,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
A special figure in which a start winning prize has been generated in the main board 11 and the effect control board 12, but not yet started, as shown in the modified example 138SG-1 which can store the information related to the variable display as the hold storage. The part that stores the hold data of the game as hold memory) and
Determining means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 10-6) that can determine the control to the advantageous state for each variable display).
Prior to the determination by the determination means, a determination means for determining whether or not the reserved storage stored in the reservation storage means is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the determination means shown in the modified example 138SG-1).
Equipped with
The effect executing means can display the predetermined display during execution of the target variable display that is the target of the determination based on the determination by the determination means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 10-6). The part in which the execution of the countdown effect can be determined by executing the variable display start setting process shown), the target variable display by the hold storage that is the target of the determination based on the determination by the determination means is executed. A predetermined display can be displayed (for example, as shown in the modification 138SG-1, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can determine the execution of the countdown effect based on the determination result of the determination means).
The rate at which the predetermined effect of the success pattern is executed differs depending on whether the predetermined display is started before the start of the variable target display or when the display is started during the variable target display (for example, a modification). As shown in 138SG-1, a counter is displayed on the image display device 5 from the case where the countdown effect is executed for the variation display from the timing when the variation display is started and the timing before the variation display is started by the determination of the determination means. Image 138SG005a is displayed to announce the execution of the countdown effect, and the rate at which the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern is different)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to the time when the predetermined display is displayed, so that the gaming interest can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the invention 138SG,
The effect executing means has a plurality of start modes having different periods from the display of the predetermined display to the start of the predetermined operation (for example, FIGS. 10-15 (A) to 10- as a modification 138SG-2. As shown in 15 (C), the predetermined effect can be executed when the period from the start of fluctuation to the start of countdown is long or short).
The rate at which the predetermined effect of the success pattern is executed varies depending on the period until the predetermined operation is started (for example, as the modified example 138SG-2, FIGS. 10-15 (A) to 10-15 (C). As shown, when the waiting period from the start of fluctuation to the start of countdown is long, the countdown effect is executed at a higher rate than when the waiting period from the start of fluctuation to the start of countdown is short).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and the period from the display of the predetermined display to the start of the predetermined operation can also be noticed, so that the gaming interest can be improved.

Further, conventionally, as a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-211762. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-211762, when the countdown effect (predetermined effect) is executed, the player always performs the mode after the countdown is completed (becomes a specific mode). There is a problem that it is not possible to attract attention and improve the interest of the production. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as means 1 of the invention 139SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Display means (for example, image display device 5) and
A suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach) suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state can be executed, and a predetermined display (for example, a counter image 138SG005a) is displayed on the display means to display the predetermined display. The predetermined effect (for example, countdown effect) in which the predetermined operation (for example, countdown) used is performed and the display mode of the predetermined display is a specific mode (for example, the super reach notification mode shown in FIG. 10-18 (B)) is described above. An effect execution means that can be executed in response to the execution of the suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10-10).
Equipped with
The effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect so that the period from when the display mode of the predetermined display becomes the specific mode to when the suggestion effect is executed is different (for example, modification 139SG-). As shown in FIG. 10-17 as 1),
The rate controlled to the advantageous state varies depending on the length of the period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17 as the modified example 139SG-1, the jackpot expectation degree depends on the waiting period from the end of the countdown to the reach. Different part)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the interest of the production can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the invention 139SG,
The effect executing means is
As the suggestion effect, a plurality of types of suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect and the chance-up effect of the super reach shown in FIG. 10-18 as the modified example 139SG-2) can be executed.
As the predetermined effect, after the predetermined display becomes the specific mode, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the predetermined display to a notification mode for notifying the type of the corresponding suggested effect (for example, Modification 139SG-2). As shown in FIGS. 10-18 (A) and 10-18 (B), after the countdown is completed, the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a is changed to a display mode for notifying the execution of the reach effect of the super reach. part),
In the predetermined effect, after the predetermined display becomes the specific mode, the predetermined display of the notification mode can be continuously displayed until the corresponding suggestion effect is started (for example, FIG. 10-18 (B). )-As shown in FIG. 10-18 (D), the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a is maintained until the start timing of the reach effect with the display mode for notifying the execution of the reach effect of the super reach).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, attention can be paid to the predetermined display even in the period from the time when the predetermined display becomes a specific mode to the start of the corresponding suggestion effect. You can improve the interest of the production.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the invention 139SG,
The effect executing means is
As the suggestion effect, a plurality of types of suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect and the chance-up effect of the super reach shown in FIG. 10-18 as the modified example 139SG-2) can be executed.
As the predetermined effect, after the predetermined display becomes the specific mode, the suggestion effect of a type not corresponding to the predetermined display is executed, and an effect of changing to a notification mode for notifying the suggestion effect of the corresponding type is executed. It is possible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 (B) to 10-18 (E) as the modified example 139SG-2, the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a is displayed as a super reach reach effect after the countdown is completed. After changing to the display mode for notifying the execution of the above, the display mode for the image 138SG005a of the counter is further changed to the display mode for notifying the execution of the chance-up effect).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to which kind of suggestive effect the predetermined display corresponds to even after the specific mode is adopted. You can improve your interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the invention 139SG,
The effect executing means is
A part of the predetermined effect including the execution period of any of the plurality of types of suggestive effects (for example, the reach effect and the chance-up effect of the super reach shown in FIG. 10-18 as the modified example 139SG-2). It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the predetermined display during the period (for example, a portion where the shutter image 138SG005b hides the counter image 138SG005a as shown in FIG. 10-19 (B) as a modification 139SG-3). ,
After making it difficult to visually recognize the predetermined display, a first pattern (for example, as a modification 139SG-3, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (C)), the image 138SG005a of the counter is continued. A pattern in which the display mode of the above is unchanged from the display mode in which the countdown is completed) and a second pattern in which the predetermined display is changed to the notification mode (for example, FIGS. 10-19 (D) and 10-19 as the modified example 139SG-3). As shown in (E), a predetermined effect can be executed by a display mode in which the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a changes to a display mode for notifying the execution of the reach effect of the super reach or the chance-up effect).
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs between the first pattern and the second pattern (for example, as shown in the modified example 139SG-3, the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a changes from the display mode in which the countdown is completed. The ratio controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on whether the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a is changed to a display mode for notifying the execution of the reach effect of the super reach or the chance up effect).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to which kind of suggestive effect the predetermined display changes to the notification mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the effect. ..

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the invention 139SG,
The effect executing means has a success pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (G)) in which the display mode becomes the specific mode by a predetermined operation (for example, countdown) using the predetermined display, in the image 138SG005a of the counter. After the value displayed in is 0 seconds (countdown is completed), the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter changes to a success mode (a display mode for notifying the execution of the reach effect of the super reach). And the failure pattern in which the display mode does not become the specific mode (for example, the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a fails without the value displayed in the counter image 138SG005a becoming 0 seconds (countdown is completed)). The predetermined effect can be executed by the pattern) that changes to the display mode) that notifies the non-execution of the reach effect of the super reach.
There are a plurality of display modes when the predetermined operation of the predetermined display is performed (for example, a portion where the image 138SG005a of the counter is displayed in blue or red as shown in FIG. 10-11).
The rate at which the predetermined effect of the success pattern is executed differs depending on the display mode when the predetermined operation of the predetermined display is performed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (C) and 10-7 (D). The rate at which the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern differs depending on the color of the image 138SG005a of the counter displayed on the image display device 5).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the interest of a predetermined production can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the invention 139SG,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on any one of the predetermined display mode, the display number of the predetermined display, or a combination thereof (for example, FIGS. 10-7 (C) and 10-7 (D)). As shown in the above, the rate at which the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern differs depending on the number of images 138SG005a of the counter displayed on the image display device 5).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, attention to a predetermined display can be further increased, and the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state by a predetermined effect can be grasped. , You can improve the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the invention 139SG,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
A special figure in which a start winning prize has been generated in the main board 11 and the effect control board 12, but not yet started, as shown in the modified example 138SG-1 which can store the information related to the variable display as the hold storage. The part that stores the hold data of the game as hold memory) and
Determining means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 10-6) that can determine the control to the advantageous state for each variable display).
Prior to the determination by the determination means, a determination means for determining whether or not the reserved storage stored in the reservation storage means is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the determination means shown in the modified example 138SG-1).
Equipped with
In the effect executing means, the value displayed in the image 138SG005a of the counter is 0 seconds as shown in the success pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (G)) in which the predetermined display is the specific mode. After the countdown is completed), the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter changes to a success mode (a display mode for notifying the execution of the reach effect of the super reach) and a failure pattern that does not become the specific mode (for example, of the counter). The display mode of the counter image 138SG005a changes to a failure mode (a display mode for notifying the non-execution of the reach effect of the super reach) without the value displayed in the image 138SG005a becoming 0 seconds (countdown is completed). The predetermined effect can be executed by the pattern), and the predetermined display can be displayed during the execution of the target variable display that is the target of the determination based on the determination by the determination means (for example, the effect control). (Part in which the execution of the countdown effect can be determined by executing the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 10-6), the target variable due to the hold storage that is the target of the determination based on the determination by the determination means. The predetermined display can be displayed before the display is executed (for example, as shown in the modified example 138SG-1, the portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can determine the execution of the countdown effect based on the determination result of the determination means. ),
The rate at which the predetermined effect of the success pattern is executed differs between when the predetermined display is started before the start of the variable target display and when the display is started during the execution of the variable target display (for example, modification). As shown in Example 138SG-1, the image display device 5 has a case where the countdown effect is executed for the variation display from the timing when the variation display is started and a timing before the variation display is started by the determination of the determination means. The rate at which the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern differs between the case where the counter image 138SG005a is displayed and the execution of the countdown effect is announced).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to the time when the predetermined display is displayed, so that the gaming interest can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the invention 139SG,
In the effect executing means, the value displayed in the image 138SG005a of the counter is 0 seconds as shown in the success pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (G)) in which the predetermined display is the specific mode. After the countdown is completed), the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter changes to a success mode (a display mode for notifying the execution of the reach effect of the super reach) and a failure pattern that does not become the specific mode (for example, of the counter). The display mode of the counter image 138SG005a changes to a failure mode (a display mode for notifying the non-execution of the reach effect of the super reach) without the value displayed in the image 138SG005a becoming 0 seconds (countdown is completed). The predetermined effect can be executed according to the pattern), and a plurality of start modes (for example, modified example 138SG-2) having different periods from the display of the predetermined display to the start of the predetermined operation are shown in FIG. 10-. As shown in FIGS. 15 (A) to 10-15 (C), the predetermined effect can be executed when the period from the start of fluctuation to the start of countdown is long or short).
The rate at which the predetermined effect of the success pattern is executed varies depending on the period until the predetermined operation is started (for example, as the modified example 138SG-2, FIGS. 10-15 (A) to 10-15 (C). As shown, when the waiting period from the start of fluctuation to the start of countdown is long, the countdown effect is executed at a higher rate than when the waiting period from the start of fluctuation to the start of countdown is short).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to the period until the predetermined operation is started, so that the gaming interest can be improved.

Further, conventionally, as a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-211762. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-211762, if there is an effect (special effect) that can be executed from the start of the variable display other than the specific effect, the special effect is performed at an appropriate timing. There is a problem that if you do not do it, your interest will decline. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as means 1 of the invention 140SG for solving the problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display of production identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. ,
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, freeze effect) in which the identification information for effect is stopped and displayed in a specific mode from the start of the variable display for a predetermined period, and the effect is different from the specific effect and is controlled to the advantageous state. An effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute a special effect (for example, a countdown effect) suggesting that the effect is to be performed is executed when the variable display is started. The part to do)
When the specific effect is executed, the effect executing means can execute the special effect when the predetermined period elapses (for example, when it is determined to execute the countdown effect and the freeze effect, FIG. 10-. As shown in 9 (B), the part where the countdown effect starts from the end timing of the freeze effect)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, a special effect is executed at an appropriate timing when a predetermined period corresponding to a specific effect elapses, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the invention 140SG,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs between the case where the specific effect and the special effect are executed and the case where the special effect is executed without executing the specific effect (for example, FIG. 10-7). As shown in, when the countdown effect and the freeze effect are executed, the ratio at which the variable display result becomes the big hit (big hit expectation) is set to be high, and only the countdown effect is executed without executing the freeze effect. In the case, the part where the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit is set lower than when the countdown effect and the freeze effect are executed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not a specific effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the invention 140SG,
The effect executing means can execute the specific effect in a plurality of embodiments having different lengths of the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20 as a modification 140SG-1, the freeze period is 1). The freeze effect can be executed in the case of seconds and the case of 3 seconds), and the special effect can be executed at the timing corresponding to the length of the predetermined period of the specific effect to be executed (for example, a modification). As shown in FIG. 10-20 as 140SG-1, the part where the countdown effect can be executed from the timing when each freeze period has elapsed),
The rate controlled to the advantageous state varies depending on the length of the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20 as a modification 140SG-1, when the freeze period is 3 seconds, the freeze occurs. The part where the rate (big hit expectation) that the variable display result becomes a big hit is higher than when the period is 1 second)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, a special effect can be executed at an appropriate timing corresponding to a specific effect having a different period, and the player can pay attention to the length of the predetermined period. And can improve the interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the invention 140SG,
It is possible to execute variable display of small effect identification information (for example, small symbol 138SG005s) smaller than the effect identification information in synchronization with the variable display of the effect identification information.
The variable display of the small effect identification information is executed even when the effect identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (L), during the execution of the freeze effect. , The variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped, while the variable display of the small symbol 138SG005s is executed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and even when the effect identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific effect, it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being executed by the small effect identification information.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the invention 140SG,
A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying at least an image related to the special effect is provided.
The effect executing means can display a suggestion image suggesting that the special effect is executed at least during the execution of the specific effect on the display means (for example, as a modification 140SG-2, FIG. 10-21 (). As shown in B), the part that displays the image 138SG005a of the counter displayed as "preparing" on the image display device 5),
During the execution of the specific effect, the display mode of the suggested image is not changed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 (B) to 10-21 (D) as the modified example 140SG-2, the freeze effect is executed. Inside is the part where the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a is not changed from the state where "Preparing" is displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the display mode of the suggestion image does not change together with the stop display of the identification information for the effect during the execution of the specific effect. Consistency can be achieved.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 11 Main board 12 Production control board 103 CPU
120 CPU for production control

Claims (2)

It is a gaming machine that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means and
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the predetermined state is controlled, and a predetermined display is displayed on the display means, a predetermined operation is performed using the predetermined display, and the display mode of the predetermined display is set as a specific mode. An effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in response to the execution of the suggestion effect,
Equipped with
The effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect so that the period from when the display mode of the predetermined display becomes the specific mode until the common suggested effect is executed is different.
The rate controlled to the favorable state depends on the length of the period.
The predetermined display includes a first predetermined display and a second predetermined display different from the first predetermined display.
The period from the specific mode to the execution of the common suggestion effect differs between when the first predetermined display is displayed and when the second predetermined display is displayed.
When the predetermined effect is executed, the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the common suggestion effect is when the first predetermined display is displayed and the second predetermined display is displayed. It ’s the same as when it was done ,
The specific effect can be executed for a predetermined period from the time when the variable display is started, and the predetermined effect can be executed after the specific effect is executed.
When the specific effect and the predetermined effect are executed, the ratio of the advantageous state is higher than when the specific effect is not executed and the predetermined effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means and
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the predetermined state is controlled, and a predetermined display is displayed on the display means, a predetermined operation is performed using the predetermined display, and the display mode of the predetermined display is set as a specific mode. An effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in response to the execution of the suggestion effect,
Equipped with
The effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect so that the period from when the display mode of the predetermined display becomes the specific mode until the common suggested effect is executed is different.
The rate controlled to the favorable state depends on the length of the period.
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute multiple types of the above-mentioned suggestive effects,
After the predetermined display is set to the specific mode, the notification effect for notifying the corresponding type of the suggestion effect can be continuously executed until the suggestion effect is started.
The specific effect can be executed for a predetermined period from the time when the variable display is started, and the predetermined effect can be executed after the specific effect is executed.
When the specific effect and the predetermined effect are executed, the ratio of the advantageous state is higher than when the specific effect is not executed and the predetermined effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images